JP7015480B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a ball-and-ball gaming machine and a spinning-type gaming machine.

The pachinko machine, which is a ball game machine, includes a rectangular outer frame forming an outer shell and a game machine main body rotatably attached to the outer frame in front of the outer frame. Further, the gaming machine main body is rotatably supported by the outer frame on the front side, the front door frame rotatably supported on the inner frame, and the inner frame on the rear side. Equipped with a back pack unit, locking device, etc.

Further, the slot machine, which is a spinning machine, also has a box-shaped housing that forms an outer shell and a front door that is pivotally installed in the housing so as to cover the opening. A start lever, a stop button, and the like are provided on the front side of the front door, and various devices and parts such as a main control device for controlling the progress of the game and a hopper for paying out the game medal are arranged inside the housing.

However, there has been no end to the so-called goto act of opening the above-mentioned inner frame, front door, etc., and malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside to obtain unfair profits. Gaming machines with countermeasures against fraudulent activities have been proposed.

For example, in Patent Document 1, a first magnet, a second magnet, and a magnetic detection device are provided side by side in a row in an overlapping region where an outer frame, a front frame, and a glass door overlap each other. In a gaming machine in which a fully closed magnetic force is detected with magnetic detectors arranged in series in a row, the alarm unit outputs an alarm signal when the magnetic force detected by the magnetic detector is less than the fully closed magnetic force. I am doing it.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-99142

However, there is a problem that the conventional gaming machine cannot suitably notify the abnormality.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably notifying an abnormality.

The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a frame body that is openable and closable to a fixed frame, a plurality of acoustic devices provided on the frame body, a detection device that detects the opening of the frame body, and the detection device. When the opening of the frame is detected, the abnormality notification means for notifying the abnormality from the plurality of acoustic devices, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, any of the plurality of acoustic devices. It is characterized by comprising a driving means for changing one or more directions from the first state facing the front of the frame body to the second state facing other than the front of the frame body.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably notify an abnormality.

It is a top view which opened the front door frame of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the positional relationship with a player. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment unfolded. It is a perspective view which shows the main structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment unfolded. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the front door frame of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the inner frame of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the back structure of the game board of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view which shows the state which the main control apparatus unit was removed from the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the main control device unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of the back pack unit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st monitoring device seen from the front of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st monitoring device seen from the rear of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a top view which shows the operation button of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of each counter used for the internal lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the winning / failing table which stored the value of the random number which wins the big hit generation of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the distribution table which stored the value of the random number which concerns on the distribution destination of the jackpot type of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for the start opening of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the normal processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the game times control process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the data setting process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the display duration of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the gaming state transition processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big winning opening opening process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data structure which is stored in the ROM of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, (a) is the figure which shows the data structure which is stored in ROM 412, (b) is the figure which shows the data structure which is stored in common ROM 404. It is a figure which shows. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the structure of the register 952 provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing executed by the voice light emission control apparatus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the game result of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment, a game state and the like. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example of the mode transition effect which is executed when it corresponds to the "most advantageous result" in the normal state of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a continuous figure which shows the effect example in the big hit time (opening and closing execution mode) of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart in the other example of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the 4th mode M4 of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the production MA of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the production MB of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition processing to the production MC of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram of the speaker part and the cover member included in the game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, (a) is the front view of the state which the speaker part is not covered by the cover member, (b) is the speaker part. A front view of the state covered by the cover member, (c) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment XX of (b), and (d) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment YY of (b). It is a figure which showed the schematic structure of the origin detection sensor of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic block diagram which shows the speaker part and the peripheral structure thereof provided with the game machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment, and (a) is a partial sectional plan view which shows the 1st state which the speaker part faces the front of a game machine. , (B) is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing the middle of the change of the direction of the speaker unit from the front surface of the game machine to the right side surface, and (c) shows the speaker unit facing the right side surface of the game machine. It is a partial cross-sectional plan view which shows 2 states. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the voice light emission control device and the display control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram for demonstrating the connection relationship with the DAC and the speaker part provided in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a conceptual diagram of the time change of the reproduction volume of the speaker part of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the abnormal state notification processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the sound data reproduction processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the data used for the transition processing to the production of the 4th mode M4 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the effect MA of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the effect MB of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the effect MC of 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure for performing the execution control of the effect of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the register of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the sequence data of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data structure of the sound light ROM of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening opening and closing processing of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ending period determination table stored in the ROM of the main control device of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of the ending period of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the 8th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the notification timing determination table of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH stored in the ROM of the voice emission control apparatus of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of the flowchart of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the effect transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process A to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process B to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process C to the 4th mode M4 of 8th Embodiment. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of the effect type (effect type) selection process of the ninth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect type (effect type) selection process of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH of the 9th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of another example of the effect transition process to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process D to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process E to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the transition process F to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart example of the transition process G to the 4th mode M4 of 9th Embodiment.

The gaming machine of the present invention has an inner frame (first frame body) that is openable and closable to the outer frame (fixed frame) and a front door frame (second frame) that is openable and closable to the inner frame. It has a body). Here, in the gaming machine, it is assumed that the front door frame is opened and the gaming area provided on the front side of the inner frame is cheated. It is also assumed that the inner frame is opened and the control device mounted on the back side of the inner frame is cheated.
For this reason, the gaming machine is provided with a control device and an openness detection switch (detection device) for detecting the opening of the inner frame with respect to the outer frame and the opening of the front door frame with respect to the inner frame. Then, when the front door frame and the inner frame are opened, the opening is detected by the opening detection switch, and the detection result is input to the control device. The control device determines that the front door frame and the inner frame have been opened based on the detection result from the release switch, and uses the speaker unit and the lamp unit to perform notification (abnormality notification) to that effect.
However, the front door frame is supported by either the right side or the left side of the inner frame with one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame as the support side, and when the front door frame is opened, the support side is supported. Will be opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the rotation axis.
Therefore, for example, when the front door frame is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, as shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame is the upper body of the player U who plays in the adjacent seat. It will be opened so as to face the right side (see FIG. 1 (a)) or the left side (see FIG. 1 (b)). Then, as described above, when the opening of the front door frame is detected, an abnormality notification is output from a loud speaker (sound device) so that the hall operator or employee can hear it. For this reason, the abnormality notification is very troublesome for the player who plays in the next seat. In addition, since the music (BGM), voice, and sound effects output from the gaming machine are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The player is excited.
The above problem does not occur only in pachinko machines, but may also occur in other gaming machines having an opening / closing body such as a front door frame or an inner frame, such as a slot machine or a parrot. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and while reducing the possibility that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification when the opening of the front door frame or the inner frame is detected. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the risk that hall operators and employees will miss the abnormality notification.

The basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the present invention can be applied are shown below.

[Pachinko machine]
An operating means operated by the player (launching handle 41), a ball launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and a predetermined game ball launched. A gaming machine provided with a ball passage (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102) leading to the gaming area 104 and each gaming component (general winning opening 82, nails, etc.) arranged in the gaming area 104.

[Bullet gaming machine equipped with a special display unit and variable display device]
An operating means operated by the player, a ball launching means for flipping and launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined gaming area 104, and a gaming area 104. It is equipped with the first and second starting ports 36 and 37, the main display device 98, the variable display unit 86 and the variable winning device 83 arranged inside, and the gaming ball enters the first and second starting ports 36 and 37. A gaming machine that variably displays the display content displayed on the main display device 98 when a ball is detected, and opens the variable winning device 83 in a predetermined mode when the display content at the time of stopping is a specific display content.

[Rotating machine such as slot machines]
It is equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row in the final stop. Then, or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. The game machine that I made.

[Belt-type gaming machine using balls]
It is equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row in the final stop. Then, or after a predetermined time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. Further, a throwing device for providing a ball tray and performing a feeding process for taking in the game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray are provided, and the game ball is thrown by the throwing device. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective.

Hereinafter, each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. As the gaming machine, a general pachinko machine will be described as an example. Further, in the following description, unless otherwise specified, the directions such as up, down, left, and right are specified with reference to the front view of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the front side in FIG. 2 is the front side, and the back side is the rear side.

[First Embodiment]
<Pachinko machine>
As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as a pachinko machine 10) according to the present embodiment is attached to a rectangular outer frame 11 forming an outer shell and rotatably forward to the outer frame 11. It is provided with the game machine main body 12 that has been created.

The outer frame 11 is a fixed frame formed in a rectangular frame shape that opens in the front-rear direction and is installed in a vertical position on an installation frame base (so-called island equipment) of a game store. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main body 12 has an inner frame 13 (frame body) rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 toward the front side (player side) and a front side (frame body) by the inner frame 13. The front door frame 14 (frame body) rotatably supported to the player side) and the back pack unit 15 (box-shaped body) rotatably supported to the rear side (far side from the player) by the inner frame 13. It is configured to be locked by the locking device 131 (see FIG. 4). A prepaid card type ball lending device (CR unit) (not shown) is provided on the left side of the outer frame 11.

The inner frame 13 is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the outer frame 11 with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side. The front door frame 14 has one of the right side or the left side (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) as the support side, and one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4). ) Is supported. The back pack unit 15 is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the inner frame 13 (the left side in FIGS. 3 and 4) with one of the right side and the left side as the support side. The locking device 131 has a cylinder lock 75 provided at the lower part of the right side or the left side of the gaming machine main body 12 (lower right side in FIG. 2), and the inner frame 13 (game machine main body 12) is attached to the outer frame 11. It has a function of making it impossible to open and a function of making the front door frame 14 unable to open with respect to the inner frame 13. In the pachinko machine 10, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 75 (see FIG. 7) and then rotated clockwise, the function of disabling the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released, and when the machine is rotated counterclockwise, the front door is released. The function of making the frame 14 unopenable to the inner frame 13 is canceled. The locking device 131 will be described in detail in FIG.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the front surface side of the inner frame 13, and has an elliptical window portion 21 that opens in the thickness direction, a transparent glass plate, a synthetic resin material, or the like that is fitted into the window portion 21. It has a window panel 22 formed by (see FIG. 3).

Further, the front door frame 14 includes a display lamp device 23A as a light emitting means arranged on the right side of the window portion 21, a display lamp device 23B as a light emitting means arranged on the left side of the window portion 21, and the like. The error display lamp unit 24 provided at the top of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the upper right side (speaker unit 26A) and the upper left side (speaker unit 26B) of the game machine main body 12, and the lower left side (speaker unit 26C). The speaker units 26A to 26C are provided as an audio output means and a navigation means. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes three speaker units 26A to 26C, but the pachinko machine 10 may include one or more speaker units, for example, four or more speaker units. The indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B have a light emitting body (not shown) such as a light bulb in which a light emitting element such as an LED (light emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element is enclosed in a glass spherical shell, and at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. It lights up or blinks according to the change in the gaming state. The error display lamp unit 24 lights up when a predetermined error occurs. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C can output voice, sound effects, and the like. Then, the display lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned on and blinked according to the symbol variation effect on the symbol display device 91, which will be described later (light emission effect), and voice and sound effects are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C (voice effect). As a result, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the speaker units 26A to 26C are configured to function as the effect executing means.

Further, the front door frame 14 has an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side (player side) on the lower side of the window portion 21. The upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The upper bulging portion 31 is provided inside so as to open upward, and has an upper plate 33 that serves as a saucer for storing game balls. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 has a lower plate 34 which is provided inside so as to open upward and serves as a receiving plate for storing the game ball. The upper plate 33 is configured such that the bottom surface is gently inclined from the left side to the right side and is tapered on the right side portion, and the game ball launching mechanism 110 is arranged while storing the stored game balls one by one. It has a function to lead to (see FIG. 7).

When the game ball becomes surplus on the upper plate 33, the game ball is discharged to the lower plate 34. That is, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 33. Further, the lower bulging portion 32 is provided with a lever that can slide in the left-right direction, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 34 is moved to the lower portion of the lower plate 34 by the player sliding the lever. It is configured to be discharged from. In the present embodiment, the upper bulging portion 31 and the lower bulging portion 32 are integrally molded with the front door frame 14 at the lower position of the front door frame 14, and are molded in accordance with the opening and closing of the front door frame 14. The upper bulge 31 and the lower bulge 32 are also configured to open and close.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a firing handle 41 as a launching means at a lower right position of the gaming machine main body 12. The launch handle 41 is urged counterclockwise (counterclockwise), and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is activated by the player rotating the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise) to move up. The game balls stored in the plate 33 are fired one by one toward the game area 104 of the game board 81 (see FIG. 8). In the present embodiment, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching mechanism 110 is performed in a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec). Further, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is controlled so as not to exceed 100 balls per minute.

The launch handle 41 is configured so that the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 changes according to the amount of rotation thereof, and as the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise). The hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 gradually increases, and the hitting force of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 110 gradually decreases as the player rotates the firing handle 41 counterclockwise (counterclockwise). It is configured. That is, as the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise), the arrival position of the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 on the game board 81 shifts from the left side to the right side.

Further, the launch handle 41 is provided with a touch sensor 41a for detecting that the player is touching the handle and a launch stop switch 41b for temporarily stopping the launch of the game ball. The launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 110 is performed when the launch handle 41 is rotated to turn on the touch sensor 41a and the launch stop switch 41b is off, and the touch sensor 41a is off or the launch stop switch 41b. If is on, the game ball will not be fired.

Further, an operation button 35 as an operation means is provided on the upper surface of the upper bulge portion 31. The operation button 35 is used when selecting an effect type (effect type), and the player can select the effect type by operating the operation button 35. As shown in FIG. 18, the operation buttons 35 include a decision button 35a arranged in the center, a left direction button 35b arranged on the left side of the decision button 35a, and a right direction button 35c arranged on the right side of the decision button 35a. And have. When selecting the effect type, the player selects the effect type by pressing the left direction button 35b and the right direction button 35c, and determines the effect type by pressing the decision button 35a arranged in the center. be able to. Further, on the upper surface of the upper bulging portion 31, a ball lending button (not shown) for instructing lending of a game ball within the range of the value balance (valuable balance) of the card inserted in the CR unit and a CR unit are provided. A return button (not shown) is provided to instruct the return of the inserted card.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, a passage forming unit 50 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 50 is made of synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage 51 leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage 52 leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 50, a receiving portion 53 protruding rearward and open upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the front door side upper plate is formed by partitioning the receiving portion 53 to the left and right by a partition wall 54. The passage 51 and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side are formed. The front door side upper plate passage 51 and the front door side lower plate passage 52 are connected to the game ball distribution section 225, which will be described later on the upstream side, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper plate passage 51 are guided to the upper plate 33. The game ball that has entered the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 6) on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts 61 and 62 are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts 61 and 62 constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a plurality of hook fittings 63 extending rearward are arranged side by side in the vertical direction on the rotation tip side (left side in FIG. 6) on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hook fittings 63 form a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 71 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. Support metal fittings 72 and 73 are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 7) on the front surface of the resin base 71. Although not shown, shaft holes are formed in the support metal fittings 72 and 73, and by inserting the protrusion shafts 61 and 62 of the front door frame 14 into these shaft holes, the front door with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. The frame 14 is rotatably supported.

An insertion hole 74 for inserting a hook metal fitting 63 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotation tip side (right side in FIG. 7) on the front surface of the resin base 71. The pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the hook fitting 63 is locked to the locking device via the insertion hole 74, so that the front door frame 14 cannot be unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13.

A cylinder lock 75 for unlocking the locking device is installed in the lower right corner of the resin base 71. The cylinder lock 75 is integrated in the locking device, and when the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned counterclockwise, the front door frame 14 is unlocked with respect to the inner frame 13. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 75 is turned to the right, the inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11. A substantially rectangular opening 71b that penetrates inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed in the upper right corner of the resin base 71, that is, on the rotation tip side of the front door frame 14. The opening 71b is provided with a first monitoring device 250 for monitoring the opening of the front door frame 14.

A substantially elliptical window hole 76 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 71. A game board 81 is detachably attached to the resin base 71. The game board 81 is made of plywood, and the game area 104 (see FIG. 8) formed on the front surface of the game board 81 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 76 of the resin base 71.

<Game board 81>
As shown in FIG. 8, the game board 81 is a substantially rectangular plate member made of a veneer material or a synthetic resin material. The game board 81 has a guide portion 103 (hereinafter, also referred to as a guide rail) composed of two rails (inner rail 101 and outer rail 102) provided on the front surface (player side) and curved in a substantially circular shape. .. The guidance rail 103 has a function of guiding the game ball launched by the game ball launch mechanism 110 to the upper left portion of the game board 81. The player operates the launch handle 41 to launch the game ball into the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103, thereby playing the game. Further, at the end of the guide rail 103, a return portion 103a is provided so that the game ball launched into the game area 104 does not return to the inside of the guide rail 103. The game ball driven into the game area 104 is detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided on the back pack unit 15 (not shown), and the ball detection signal of the detection sensor is a hall computer (not shown). It is configured to be output to. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor is provided in the back pack unit 15, but it may be provided in another place, for example, in the game board 81.

Further, the game board 81 is subjected to router processing, so that a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the plate thickness direction are formed at appropriate positions. Further, each opening of the game board 81 is provided with a general winning opening 82, a first starting opening 84a, a second starting opening 84b, a variable winning device 83, and an out opening 87. The position and number of openings formed in the game area 104 of the game board 81 can be appropriately changed as needed. The game board 81 is provided with through gates 85 on the left side of the central portion and the right side of the central portion. The main display device 98 is provided at a position that can be visually recognized by the player of the game board 81. A variable display unit 86 is provided at the center of the game board 81. The game board 81 is provided with a large number of game nails 89 in the game area 104, and a rotation guide member 88 (so-called “windmill”) is arranged on the right side of the game board 81. The rotation guide member 88 is arranged on the game board 81 so as to freely rotate by contact with a game ball flowing down the game area 104. Therefore, when the game ball flowing down the game area 104 comes into contact with the game nail 89 or the rotation guide member 88, the flow direction of the game ball changes irregularly (randomly).

In the present embodiment, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area 104 after passing through the opening but also the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes an embodiment in which the flow of the game area 104 is continued without being discharged from the 104. Further, in order to clearly distinguish it from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 87, the entry of the game ball into various winning openings is also referred to as a winning. Further, entering the through gate 85 means that after passing through the gate provided in the game area 104, the ball continues to flow down the game area 104 without being discharged from the game area 104. The entry into the through gate 85 is also referred to as a entry in the same manner as the entry into various winning openings.

<Starting winning opening>
As shown in FIG. 8, the first starting port 84a and the second starting port 84b are arranged in a vertical positional relationship, that is, in the vertical direction. Here, the first starting port 84a located on the upper side is a constantly open type winning opening that always opens upward in the game area 104. Further, on both the left and right sides of the second starting port 84b located on the lower side, an electric accessory (so-called electric tulip (electric tulip)) composed of a pair of opening / closing members 84b1 configured to open / close the second starting port 84b. Is provided. An electric accessory driving unit 84b2 as a driving means is connected to the pair of opening / closing members 84b1, and the pair of opening / closing members 84b1 closes the second starting port 84b as the electric accessory driving unit 84b2 is driven. It is configured to be displaced between the position and the open position. In the present embodiment, a pair of opening / closing members 84b1 for opening / closing the second starting port 84b are arranged on the left and right side portions sandwiching the second starting port 84b, and the pair of opening / closing members 84b1 are driven by driving the electric accessory driving unit 84b2. The mutual positions are driven so as to be close to each other and separated from each other.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first starting port 84a is configured so that the game ball flowing down the game area 104 can always win a prize, and the second starting port 84b drives the electric accessory driving unit 84b2. It is configured so that the winning probability of the game ball is variable. Here, in a state where the opening / closing members 84b1 provided on both the left and right sides sandwiching the second starting port 84b are displaced to the closed position (hereinafter, the electric service closed state), the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b is prevented. Therefore, the probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 84b is lower than the probability that the game ball will win the first starting port 84a. Further, in the state where the opening / closing member 84b1 is displaced to the open position (hereinafter, the electric service open state), the game ball received by the opening / closing member 84b1 is guided to the second starting port 84b and the game is played to the first starting port 84a. The probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 84b is higher than the probability that the ball will win.

In addition, in the electric accessory, instead of the above-mentioned electric service closed state and electric service open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 84b (unlike the electric service closed state, the game ball can be entered. It may be configured to switch between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 84b.

<Variable winning device>
As shown in FIG. 8, the variable winning device 83 opens and closes in a rectangular plate shape that allows the special winning opening 83a (hereinafter referred to as the large winning opening) as a special winning means to open in the game area 104 to be opened and closed. A door (opening / closing member, opening / closing means) 83b is provided, and the opening / closing door 83b is configured to be displaced between a closed state and an open state when the variable winning drive unit 83c as a driving means is driven. In this embodiment, the opening / closing door 83b is configured to open / close the special winning opening by swinging in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 8, the opening / closing door 83b closes the large winning opening 83a. Shows.

In the present embodiment, the opening / closing door 83b is set to a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal state. Then, when the shift to the open / close execution mode is won in the internal lottery and the shift to the open / close execution mode is performed, the open / close door 83b is set to the open state in which the game ball can win a prize. The open / close execution mode (specific control state) is a mode in which the open / close door 83b is set to the open state and the game ball can be inserted into the large winning opening 83a. Further, in the present embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing door 83b is set to the open state and then set to the closed state again in one round game, but the opening / closing door 83b in one round game is used. The number of opening and closing is arbitrary. For example, the opening / closing number of the opening / closing door 83b may be set to a plurality of times (twice or more) in one round game, and in this case, the opening / closing state and the closed state of the opening / closing door 83b are set a plurality of times in one round game. It will be.

The player maximizes the amount of rotation of the firing handle 41, and sets the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the side of the opposite side. By shifting to (so-called right-handed), the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 83 while avoiding the variable display unit 86 and the like.

<Detection sensor>
The game board 81 detects the entry of a game ball in the vicinity of the general winning opening 82, the first starting opening 84a, the second starting opening 84b, and the various winning openings of the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. The detection sensors 152 to 154b are provided (see FIG. 17). Further, these detection sensors 152 to 154b are arranged on the back side of the game board 81, the detection sensor 152 detects the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 82, and the detection sensor 154a goes to the first starting port 84a. The detection sensor 154b detects the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 84b, and the detection sensor 153 detects the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. Is detected. The detection sensors 152 to 154b are wired and connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the detection sensors 152 to 154b detect the game ball (general winning opening 82, first starting port 84a). , A predetermined number of prize balls (game balls obtained by winning) are paid out in the wake of the winning of the game balls to the various winning openings of the second starting opening 84b and the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83. ing.

In the present embodiment, when the detection sensor 152 detects that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the general winning opening 82, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls, and the detection sensor 154a causes the pachinko machine 10 to enter the first starting port 84a. When detected, three prize balls are paid out, and when the detection sensor 154b detects that the ball has entered the second starting port 84b, two prize balls are paid out, and the detection sensor 153 pays out the large variable winning device 83. When a ball entering the winning opening 83a is detected, 13 prize balls are paid out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning a game ball to various prize openings is not limited to these, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the first starting port 84a may be the same as the number of prize balls paid out by winning the game ball to the second starting port 84b. Further, a plurality of (two or more) variable prize devices 83 are provided in the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the number of prize balls to be paid out for each prize in the large prize opening 83a of the plurality of variable prize devices 83 is different. Also, for example, when two variable winning devices 83 are provided, the number of prize balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening 83a of each variable winning device 83 may be 13 and 14, respectively.

The out port 87 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 104 of the game board 81, and the game balls that have not entered the various winning openings and the like are discharged from the game area 104 through the out port 87. The out port 87 is arranged on the back side of the game board 81, and includes a detection sensor 156 that detects the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 17).

Further, each through gate 85 is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 81 and includes a detection sensor 155 for detecting the entry of the game ball (see FIG. 17). The detection sensors 155 and 156 are wired and connected to the main control board 301 arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, but the pachinko machine 10 has an out port unlike the case where a ball enters various winning openings. If a ball enters the 87 and each through gate 85, the prize ball will not be paid out.

It should be noted that each of the detection sensors 152 to 156 may be capable of individually detecting the entry of a game ball into various winning openings, and for example, an electromagnetic induction sensor, a transmissive photo sensor, or the like can be used.

<Design display>
The main display device 98 has a main display unit 93, a display unit 94 for accessories, and a round display unit 97, and has a segment display unit in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, a dot display device, and the like. It is configured by arranging multiple display devices. The main display device 98 is provided on the game board 81 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof, and can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the window panel 22. ing. Further, the distance (gap) between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22 is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball flows down in the gap between the main display device 98 and the window panel 22, that is, in front of the main display device 98.

<Main display unit 93>
The main display unit 93 is performed based on the first result display unit 93a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the first starting port 84a and the winning of the second starting port 84b. A second result display unit 93b for displaying the result of the internal lottery is provided (see FIG. 17).

<First result display unit 93a>
The first result display unit 93a executes the variable display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the first starting port 84a, and is performed based on the winning of the first starting port 84a as the stop result of the variable display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a, the first result display unit 93a is sequentially turned on and off, and the fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the first result display unit 93a is performed. Multiple types (types) of special symbols are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the first result display unit 93a displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

<Second result display unit 93b>
The second result display unit 93b executes the variable display of the symbol triggered by the winning of the second starting port 84b, and is performed based on the winning of the second starting port 84b as the stop result of the variable display. Display the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b, the second result display unit 93b is sequentially turned on and off, and a fluctuating variable display is performed, and finally the second result display unit 93b is performed. A plurality of types (types) of special symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as special symbols) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) in which is definitively lit. When the result of this internal lottery corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode, the second result display unit 93b displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. ..

Here, the special figure is a symbol for notifying indicating the result of an internal lottery such as whether or not it is a big hit (specific game), and in the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, the lighting position of the LED or the like is It is possible to display multiple types of special figures. Specifically, the special figures that can be displayed on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b include a plurality of types of special figures as the big hit display result that can recognize the big hit, and the deviation that can recognize the deviation. One type of special figure as a display result is set. Then, one special map is determined according to the result of the lottery per special map, and as a stop result of the variable display, the previously determined special map is stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b. Will be done.

In the following description, the variation display performed by the first result display unit 93a is referred to as "special figure 1 variation display", and as a result of the special figure 1 variation display, the fixed stop display is displayed on the first result display unit 93a. The special figure is also called special figure 1. Similarly, the variation display performed on the second result display unit 93b is referred to as "second special figure variation display", and as a result of the second special figure variation display, the special figure displayed on the second result display unit 93b as a definite stop display. Is also referred to as special figure 2.

<Display unit 94 for accessories>
The accessory display unit 94 executes the variable display of the symbol triggered by the winning of each through gate 85, and as a result of stopping the variable display, the internal lottery is performed based on the winning of each through gate 85. Display the result of. Specifically, when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 85, the accessory display unit 94 blinks and fluctuates in sequence, and the accessory display unit 94 finally turns on and off. A plurality of types of ordinary symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as normal symbols) are displayed depending on the lighting position (stop result) that is definitively lit. When the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the transition to the electric service open state, the accessory display unit 94 displays a predetermined stop result, and then the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric service open state. do. In this electric service open state, the opening / closing member 84b1 of the electric accessory provided in the second starting port 84b is in the open state.

<Round display unit 97>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination is won, one jackpot game is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot games (specific games) described later. A plurality of types of jackpot games with different numbers of rounds are set, and the number of rounds of the winning jackpot game is notified by the round display unit 97. In the present embodiment, two types of "15 times" and "2 times" are set as the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the number of rounds is notified by the lighting pattern of the LED provided in the round display unit 97. In the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 includes two LEDs arranged on the left and right, and by turning on the LED on the left side, it is notified that the number of rounds is "15 times" and it is a big hit game on the right side. By turning on the LED, it is notified that the number of rounds is "twice", which is a big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the main display unit 93 and the accessory display unit 94 are configured by arranging a plurality of display devices such as a segment display and a dot display, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be composed of other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix. Further, as the symbols to be variablely displayed on the main display unit 93 and the accessory display unit 94, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variablely displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variablely displayed. , Or a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be adopted. Further, in the present embodiment, the round display unit 97 notifies the number of round games by a light emitting display using an LED, but the number of round games is not limited to this, and the liquid crystal display device, the organic EL display device, and the CRT are used. , Dot matrix and other other types of display devices may be used to notify the number of round games. The display areas of the main display unit 93, the accessory display unit 94, and the round display unit 97 are set to be extremely small compared to the display areas such as the notification effect described later, which are executed by the symbol display device 91. For a player who is paying attention to various effects executed by the symbol display device 91, each information can be easily recognized by the lighting state of the main display unit 93, the accessory display unit 94, and the round display unit 97. It's getting harder.

Further, the variable display unit 86 includes a symbol display device 91 that variablely displays (variable display or switching display) a symbol that is a kind of symbol. Further, the variable display unit 86 includes a center frame 92 arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 91. The upper portion of the center frame 92 is provided so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front surface side thereof. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G is lowered due to the fall of the game ball. It is composed.

<Design display device 91>
The symbol display device 91 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and is detachably attached to the game board 81 so that the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 faces the front side (player side) of the game board 81. Has been done. The symbol display device 91 displays a variable display of a decorative symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a decorative diagram) for directing when a predetermined condition is satisfied (a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b). Start. That is, when the symbol display device 91 executes the variation display on the first result display unit 93a of the main display unit 93 and the variation display on the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, the symbol display device 91 is adjusted accordingly. And execute the variable display. The symbol display device 91 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, etc., as well as a drum type symbol display device and a dot matrix type symbol display device. Various conventionally known display devices capable of stopping and variable display of various symbols such as the above can be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 9, the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment is set with a plurality of symbol display rows Z1, Z2, Z3 capable of variablely displaying decorative drawings, and the first start port 84a or the second start port 84a or the second. With the winning of the starting port 84b as an opportunity, the decorative drawing starts to change in each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3. Further, the effective stop positions of the decorative figures are set in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3, respectively, and the stop symbols that combine the effective stop positions of the respective symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 by the symbol variation effect are set. The symbol combination of the decorative drawing that is stopped and displayed on the effective line L is derived. In the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment, three rows of symbol display rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set side by side, and the decorative drawing is effectively stopped for each symbol display row Z1, Z2, Z3. The positions are determined one by one, and a pattern variation effect consisting of three rows of decorative drawings is performed. That is, one stop symbol effective line L is set in the symbol display device 91 of the present embodiment. In the following description, the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z2, and the symbol display column Z3 may be referred to in order from the left side.

Further, the display area of the decorative figure in each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 91 is composed of a larger area than the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b. The decorative drawing is displayed much larger than the figure. Therefore, the player can visually recognize whether it is a big hit or a miss from the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L of the symbol display device 91.

The symbol display device 91 is configured to perform variation display so that the decorative figure moves along a predetermined variation direction (vertical direction from top to bottom in this embodiment) at the start of the symbol variation effect. , The decorative drawings that are variablely displayed are stopped and displayed at the effective stop positions of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 in a predetermined stop order. Further, the symbol display device 91 temporarily temporarily stops and displays the decorative figure at the effective stop position of each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 before the symbol variation effect is completed, and each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. By stopping and displaying the decorative drawing of, one symbol variation effect is completed. That is, the symbol variation effect (special figure 1 variation display and second special figure variation display) is performed from the start of variation to the final stop of the decorative drawings (special figure 1 and special figure 2) performed based on one start hold information. It is designed to be executed once.

Here, the "variable display" is a state in which the decorative figures displayed at the effective stop positions in the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are changed in a predetermined order. Further, the "fixed stop" of the decorative drawing means that the decorative drawing continues at the effective stop position in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 for a predetermined special figure fluctuation interval time (for example, 600 ms (milliseconds)). It is the state where the stop is displayed. Further, the "temporary stop" of the decorative drawing is a state in which the decorative drawing displayed so as to stay at the effective stop position in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 is not continuously stopped during the special figure fluctuation interval time. Is. That is, the temporary stop of the decorative drawing includes a state in which the decorative drawing is displayed in a fluctuating state at the effective stop position and a state in which the decorative drawing is stopped and displayed in a time shorter than the special drawing fluctuation interval time.

Further, in the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91, the symbol variation effect related to the special figure 1 variation display and the special figure 1 variation display is started, and the special figure 1 and the decorative drawing are fixedly stopped and displayed. Similarly, in the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91, the second special figure variation display and the symbol variation effect related to the second special figure variation display are started, and the special figure 2 and the decorative figure are fixedly stopped and displayed. To. The first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b do not simultaneously display the special figure variation, and the special figure variation is performed on either the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b. When the display is performed, the other special figure variation display is not performed.

Here, in the symbol display device 91 according to the present embodiment, ten kinds of numbers "0" to "9" are set as basic decorative figures in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3, and the decoration is set. The figure is changed and displayed in order in each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3. The mode of variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 91 is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. For example, the number of columns of the symbol row, the scroll direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols of each symbol row, and the like can be appropriately changed. Further, the symbol of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined, or may be a mode of only a picture, instead of the mode of only numbers. In addition, the decorative drawing may be given a first identification symbol that the player can definitely recognize that the probability change state (described later) is given after the jackpot game ends, and a probability change state after the jackpot game ends. It is classified as a second identification symbol that can be uncertainly recognized as having.

Here, as the first identification symbol, a special decorative drawing other than the basic decorative drawing may be used even if it is appropriately set from the basic decorative drawings. For example, the odd-numbered symbols of "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" and the even-numbered symbols of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" are the first. The identification symbol of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8" can be used as the second identification symbol. In this way, the player can decorate each of the symbol display columns Z1, Z2, Z3 which is fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position (stop symbol effective line L) of each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 in the symbol display device 91. It is possible to grasp whether or not the winning game is given by the figure. In the present embodiment, as a winning symbol combination, a symbol combination (for example, "1 ・ 1 ・ 1", "2 ・ 2 ・ 2", etc.) in which the same decorative pattern is fixedly stopped and displayed at the effective stop position of each symbol display column is displayed. ) Is set.

The symbol combination of the decorative pattern that can recognize this jackpot becomes the winning display result, and the jackpot game that is advantageous to the player is given after the symbol variation effect is completed. On the other hand, if even one of the symbols in all the rows displayed at the effective stop position of the symbol display device 91 is different, in principle, the jackpot game is not given from the combination of the symbols. Can be recognized. The combination of decorative patterns that can recognize this deviation is the deviation display result.

Further, the symbol display device 91 displays a symbol combination of decorative drawings according to the displayed special map as a result of the special map variation display on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b. That is, the special figure displayed on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b and the symbol combination of the decorative figure displayed on the symbol display device 91 correspond to each other, and when the symbol variation effect is completed. , The special figure is fixedly stopped on the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, and the decorative figure is fixedly stopped and displayed on each symbol display column Z1, Z2, Z3 of the symbol display device 91. ing. It should be noted that it is not always necessary to make the symbol combination of the decorative pattern for the special symbol one-to-one, and the symbol combination of a plurality of decorative symbols may be associated with one special symbol.

The center frame 92 includes a first holding lamp portion 95a provided in the lower left area of the symbol display device 91, a second holding lamp portion 95b provided in the lower right area of the symbol display device 91, and a symbol display. It is provided with a third holding lamp unit 96 provided in the upper area of the device 91.

<Hold lamp>
The first holding lamp unit 95a includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the first starting port 84a, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holdings of the game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the first holding lamp unit 95a is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the first hold lamp unit 95a corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 93a and the symbol display device 91. That is, the number of holdings displayed by the first holding lamp unit 95a is added by 1 when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display of the first result display unit 93a is performed. To.

The second holding lamp unit 95b includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in the second starting port 84b, and the LEDs are lit by the same number as the number of holdings of the game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four gaming balls. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the second holding lamp unit 95b is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 95b corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 93b and the symbol display device 91. That is, the number of holdings displayed by the second holding lamp unit 95b is added by 1 when the game ball wins the second starting port 84b, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variation display of the second result display unit 93b is performed. To.

The third holding lamp unit 96 includes an LED that displays the number of holdings of the winning game balls in each through gate 85, and the LED lights up according to the number of holdings of the game balls. The pachinko machine 10 can hold up to four gaming balls in the third holding lamp unit 96. Therefore, the number of LEDs included in the third holding lamp unit 96 is four, which is the same as the maximum number of holding balls. Further, the second hold lamp unit 95b corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 94. That is, the number of holds displayed by the third hold lamp unit 96 is added by 1 when the game ball wins a prize in each through gate 85, and is subtracted by 1 each time the variable display of the accessory display unit 94 is performed. ..

The pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the number of holdings of the game ball by turning on the LEDs of the holding lamp portions 95a, 95b, 96, but the symbol display device 91 is the first as an image. Other configurations may be used, such as notifying the starting port 84a, the second starting port 84b, and each through gate 85 of the number of reserved game balls. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of LEDs provided in each of the holding lamp units 95a to 96 is set to four corresponding to the maximum holding number 4, but for example, two LEDs are arranged side by side and the holding number is "1". "2", the LED is "lit" in order from the left or right, and when the number of holds is "3" to "4", the number of holds is notified to the player by "blinking" in order from the left or right. You may try to do it.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball launch mechanism 110 is attached below the window hole 76 in the resin base 71. The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes an electromagnetic solenoid 111, a launch rail 112, and a ball feed mechanism 113, and the output shaft of the solenoid 111 moves in the expansion / contraction direction by inputting an electric signal to the solenoid 111. , The ball feed mechanism 113 launches the game ball placed on the launch rail 112 toward the game area.

There is a gap between the launch rail 112 and the inner and outer rails 101 and 102 attached to the game board 81 at predetermined intervals, and below this gap is a foul formed in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. A ball passage 55 is arranged (see FIG. 3). Therefore, if the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the upper part of the game area and reverts to the guidance rail composed of the inner and outer rails 101 and 102, the foul ball is foul. Enter the ball passage 55. The foul ball passage 55 leads to the lower plate passage 52 on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage 55 is discharged to the lower plate 34.

In the resin base 71, a substantially rectangular opening 71c that penetrates inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction) is formed below the launch rail 112 (see FIG. 5). A second monitoring device 290 that monitors the opening of the inner frame 13 is fitted in the opening 71c. Details of the second monitoring device 290 will be described later.

On the left side of the launch rail 112 in the resin base 71, a passage forming portion (see FIG. 3) 121 is provided so as to penetrate the resin base 71 in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIG. 10, the passage forming portion 121 is formed with a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to the game ball distribution unit 225, which will be described later. Further, the receiving portion 53 of the passage forming unit 50 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming portion 121, and the front door side upper plate passage 51 is below the main body side upper plate passage 122. The front door side upper plate passage 51 is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123 (see FIG. 6).

In the resin base 71, below the passage forming portion 121, an opening / closing member 124 (see FIG. 10) for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof, and is urged to a front position for closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 (not shown). An urging member is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure and closes the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123. As a result, when the front door frame 14 is opened while the game balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage 122 or the main body side lower plate passage 123, the inconvenience that the stored balls are spilled can be prevented. On the other hand, in the state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion 53 provided in the passage forming unit 50 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage 51 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage 52 communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.
A locking device 131 is provided on the rotation tip side (left side in FIG. 10) on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the locking device 131 is interlocked with the key operation of the cylinder lock 75, and the inner frame 13 and the front door are provided. The frame 14 is unlocked. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side portion of the back surface of the inner frame 13.

A bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 10) on the back surface of the resin base 71. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the resin base 71, a hole 134 for fastening the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame 13 is provided.

A plurality of locking metal fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 71, and the game board 81 is attached to the resin base 71 by these locking metal fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 81 will be described. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board 81 as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 12 is a rear view showing a state in which the main control device unit 160 is removed from the game board 81.

The variable display unit 86 arranged in the center of the game board 81 is provided with a synthetic resin frame cover 141 that covers the center frame 92 from behind, and is provided so as to project rearward from the rear side with respect to the frame cover 141. The symbol display device 91 described above is attached, and a display control device for driving the symbol display device is attached (not shown). The symbol display device 91 and the display control device are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front-rear direction (the symbol display device is in front and the display control device is in the rear), and the voice lamp control device unit 142 is mounted behind the symbol display device 91 and the display control device. The voice lamp control device unit 142 is configured to include a voice emission control device 400 (not shown in FIGS. 10 to 12) and a mounting base 144, and the voice emission control device 400 is mounted on the mounting base 144. Has been done.

The voice emission control device 400 includes a voice lamp control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 500 according to instructions from the main control device 300 described later, and the voice lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed in a substrate box 145 and is configured.

On the back surface of the game board 81, a set plate unit (not shown) is provided below the variable display unit 86. The collecting board unit is provided with a game ball collection mechanism for collecting game balls that have won in various winning openings, a winning detection mechanism for detecting the winning of game balls in various winning openings, and the like.

Explaining the game ball recovery mechanism with reference to FIG. 8, the collecting plate unit has a game board opening of the general winning opening 82, the variable winning device 83, and the operating opening 84 (first and second starting ports 84a, 84b). A collection passage 151 is formed corresponding to the portion and gathers at one place on the downstream side. Therefore, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 82 or the like are gathered below the game board 81 via the collection passage 151. Below the game board 81, there is a discharge passage described later, and the game balls gathered below the game board 81 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage 151. The out port 87 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won any prize is also led out into the discharge passage through the out port 87.

Similarly, the winning detection mechanism will be described with reference to FIG. 12. The collecting plate unit is provided with detection sensors 152 at positions corresponding to the general winning openings 82 on the front side of the game board 81. Further, the detection sensor 153 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 83, and the detection sensors 154a and 154b are provided at positions corresponding to the first and second starting ports 84a and 84b. The winning of the game ball is detected by these detection sensors 152 to 154b, respectively. Further, on the right side of the variable display unit 86 outside the collective plate unit, a detection sensor 155 for detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 85 is provided. Further, a detection sensor 156 (see FIG. 12) is provided at a position corresponding to the out port 87.

As shown in FIG. 11, the main control device unit 160 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 81 so as to cover the collecting plate unit from the rear side. The configuration of the main controller unit 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller unit 160.
The main control device unit 160 has a mounting base 161 made of synthetic resin, and a main control device 300 (not shown in FIG. 13) described later is mounted on the mounting base 161. The main control device 300 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the same.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions 164 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but the box base and the box cover can be provided by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the sealing portion 164. And are combined so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed, and once the seal is opened. It is possible to perform the sealing process again even after this is done. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened, such as when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the sealing portion into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing portion is connected. Disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other sealing portion. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

A plurality of coupling pieces 165 are provided on one short side of the board box 163 so as to project laterally thereof. These coupling pieces 165 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of bonded pieces 166 formed on the mounting base 161, and the coupling piece 165 and the coupling piece 166 form between the substrate box 163 and the mounting base 161. Sealing process is performed.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described. FIG. 14 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.
The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 4), and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a base portion 211 to which a payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 86.

The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the back pack is provided by inserting the hooking pins 214 through the bearing portion 133 provided on the inner frame 13. The unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, the base portion 211 is provided with a fastener 215 for fastening to the fastened hole 134 provided in the inner frame 13, and the fastener 215 is fitted into the fastened hole 134 to be fitted inside. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the frame 13.

The base portion 211 is provided with a payout mechanism portion 202 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. That is, a tank 221 opened upward is provided at the uppermost portion of the back pack 201, and the tank 221 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected below the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls discharged from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. The side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage 51 lead to the upper plate 33, and the central opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage 52. The outer opening is formed so as to lead to the discharge passage.

A back pack board (power receiving unit or external power receiving unit) 229 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 202. For example, a main power supply of 24 volts AC is supplied to the back pack board 229, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 229a.

A discharge passage board 203 (see FIG. 4) and a control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board 203 is formed with a discharge passage opened rearward on the surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage 151 or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Is discharged to.

The control device collective unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241 on which a payout control device 242 and a power supply and launch control device 243 (hereinafter, also referred to as a power supply / launch control device 243) are mounted. There is. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 242 includes a payout control board that controls the payout device 224 in the board box 244. The signal of the payout command from the payout control device 242 to the payout device 224 is relayed by the back pack board 229 described above. Further, the payout control device 242 is provided with a state return switch 245. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam can be cleared.

An external terminal board 213 is provided on the right side of the board box 244. The external terminal board 213 has an output terminal for outputting various error information generated in the pachinko machine 10, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the inner frame 13 is opened, and a signal output when the front door frame 14 is opened. An output terminal or the like is provided for this purpose. Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state on the frame side is output to the management control device (or hall computer) on the game hall side.

In the power supply / launch control device 243, the power supply and the launch control board are housed in the board box 246, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and further, the launch handle by the player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of 41. Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 247. This pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data so that it can maintain the state at the time of power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure and can return to the state at the time of power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become. Therefore, if the power is shut off in the normal procedure, for example, when the game hall is closed, the state before the shutoff is stored and retained, but if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 247, the RAM data is initialized. It has become like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13 is equipped with the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, a back pack unit open detector 289 for detecting the opening of the back pack unit 15 is provided on the upper left side portion of the back surface of the inner frame 13. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at the upper part on the opening / closing tip side of the inner frame 13, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by the first monitoring device 250. On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 13. Specifically, the back pack unit 15 is arranged below the lower end edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state, and can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 5). The opening of the inner frame 13 is monitored by the second monitoring device 290. Further, the opening of the back pack unit 15 is detected by the back pack unit opening detector 289.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 10, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are mounted on the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13. The first monitoring device 250 is arranged at the upper part on the opening / closing tip side of the inner frame 13, and the opening of the front door frame 14 is monitored by the first monitoring device 250. On the other hand, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged at the lower part of the inner frame 13. Specifically, the second monitoring device 290 is arranged below the lower end edge of the back pack unit 15 in the closed state of the back pack unit 15, and the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, in other words, the inner frame 13 Opening is being monitored.

The first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 have the same configuration, but their mounting directions and accompanying configurations are different. Therefore, here, only the configuration of the first monitoring device 250 will be described, and the configuration of the second monitoring device 290 will be omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the first monitoring device 250 includes a storage case body 251 and a lid case body 280, and both case bodies 251, 280 are fixed by fasteners such as screws. The housing 252 is formed. The housing 252 (both cases 251,280) is made of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like having light transmission, and the inside of the housing 252 is visible. Therefore, the inside of the first monitoring device 250 can be easily confirmed, and maintenance and the like are facilitated. As described above, since it is easy to check the inside of the first monitoring device 250, it is easy to detect fraudulent acts such as obstructing the monitoring function of the first monitoring device 250.

The first monitoring device 250 is arranged in the upper corner of the resin base 71 with the accommodating case body 251 on the front side and the lid case body 280 on the rear side. In the state of being arranged in this way, it is fixed to the back surface of the resin base 71 by fasteners such as bolts.
The storage case body 251 has a top plate portion 253, a bottom plate portion 254, a front plate portion 255, a left plate portion 256, and a right plate portion 257, and is a pachinko machine when attached to the upper part of the inner frame 13 on the opening / closing tip side. The rear side of the 10 is formed in an open box shape. The front plate portion 255 is substantially parallel to the back surface of the resin base 71. The front plate portion 255 is formed with an upper extending portion 258 extending upward from the boundary with the top plate portion 253 and a lower extending portion 259 extending downward from the boundary with the bottom plate portion 254. The protrusions 258 and 259 are in contact with the back surface of the resin base 71.

Both extending portions 258 and 259 are provided with round holes 258a and 259a into which columnar boss portions formed on the resin base 71 are fitted, respectively. Then, the cylindrical boss portions are fitted into the round holes 258a and 259a, respectively, so that the first monitoring device 250 is positioned in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, an overhanging portion 260 is formed in the lower portion of the front plate portion 255 so as to project forward in a stepped shape, and an opening portion 71b corresponding to the overhanging portion 260 is formed in the resin base 71. Further, the opening 71b is a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the overhanging portion 260. By fitting the overhanging portion 260 into the opening portion 71b, the boundary portion between the resin base 71 and the first monitoring device 250 has a crank shape. As a result, the inconvenience that an illegal tool or the like is inserted from the boundary portion between the opening portion 71b and the overhanging portion 260 is suppressed. Further, the respective dimensions are set so that the front surface of the resin base 71 and the front surface of the overhanging portion 260 are substantially on the same surface, and the overhanging portion 260 does not protrude forward from the resin base 71. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the arrangement position of the first monitoring device 250 is displaced due to the overhanging portion 260 being caught during maintenance work or the like.

Inside the housing 252 (more specifically, inside the housing case 251), there is a detection device 265 that detects the open / closed state of the front door frame 14, and an operating mechanism that continuously operates by being supplied with electric power. 275 and is installed.

The detection device 265 is arranged behind the opening 71b of the resin base 71, that is, behind the overhanging portion 260. More specifically, it is arranged on the rotation tip side of the front door frame 14 inside the accommodation case body 251. The detection device 265 includes a light emitting element 266 (photodiode) that emits light, a light receiving element 267 (phototransistor) that receives light from the light emitting element 266, and an accommodating body 268 that houses the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267. I have.

The accommodating body 268 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped main body portion 269 and protruding portions 269a and 269b protruding in the left-right direction at the lower portion of the main body portion 269. The housing body 268 is arranged so that the front surface thereof is parallel to the front plate portion 255. The protruding portions 269a and 269b are formed in a plate shape parallel to the bottom plate portion 254, and the protruding portions 269a and 269b are fitted (inserted) into the first guide groove 270 formed in the housing case body 251. As a result, the detection device 265 is attached to the accommodation case body 251.
The first guide grooves 270 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and at the rear end thereof, they are opened to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the protrusions 269a and 269b are inserted into the first guide grooves 270. As a result, the outer peripheral surfaces of the protrusions 269a and 269b come into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the first guide groove 270, and the vertical and horizontal movements of the detection device 265 are restricted.

Further, a contact portion 271 to which the accommodating body 268 hits is provided at the front portion of the first guide groove 270. The contact portion 271 is raised inward of the housing case body 251 and has an upper contact surface 271a parallel to the inner surface of the bottom plate portion 254 and a rear contact surface 271b parallel to the inner surface of the front plate portion 255. is doing. When the detection device 265 is pushed along the first guide groove 270, the accommodating body 268 and the rear contact surface 271b come into contact with each other. This restricts the forward movement of the detector 265. In such a state where the forward movement is restricted, a predetermined gap is secured between the front plate portion 255 of the accommodation case body 251 and the detection device 265. The accommodating body 268 is fixed to the accommodating case body 251 by fasteners such as screws in a state where movement in each of the forward, horizontal, and vertical directions is restricted as described above.

Through holes 269c and 269d penetrating in the front-rear direction are arranged side by side in the main body portion 269 of the accommodating body 268 with a predetermined interval. A light emitting element 266 and a light receiving element 267 are fitted in the through holes 269c and 269d, respectively, with the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion facing forward. The through holes 269c and 269d are arranged above the upper contact surface 271a (contact portion 271) so that the passage of light between the elements 272 and 273 is not blocked by the contact portion 271. .. More specifically, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is emitted from the housing case body 251 without being blocked by the contact portion 271 and is irradiated toward the back surface of the front door frame 14. Further, the central axes of the through holes 269c and 269d are orthogonal to the front plate portion 255, and the central axes of both elements 266 and 267 are also orthogonal to the front plate portion 255. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 is incident on the front plate portion 255, so that it is difficult to be refracted or reflected.

As shown in FIG. 6, a light reflecting member 274 that reflects the light from the light emitting element 266 toward the light receiving element 267 is provided in front of the detection device 265, that is, on the back side of the front door frame 14. The light reflecting member 274 is fixed to the front door frame 14 by fasteners such as screws in a state of being housed in the storage recess 14a formed in the front door frame 14, and the protrusion from the back surface of the front door frame 14 is formed. It is suppressed.
The light reflecting member 274 is composed of a light-transmitting glass prism. When the front door frame 14 is not open, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the light from the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light is received by the light receiving element 267. The door.
On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is open, in other words, when the front door frame 14 is not closed, the position of the light reflecting member 274 is displaced by opening the front door frame 14. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 shifts in the direction reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light is not received by the light receiving element 267.

Next, the operation mechanism 275 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the operation mechanism 275 is arranged on the side of the detection device 265, and the main configuration thereof is a solenoid 276 provided as a power source of the operation mechanism 275 and a solenoid 276 thereof. It is provided with an operating shaft 277 inserted into the machine.

The solenoid 276 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape extending in the vertical direction, and a mounting portion 278 to the housing case body 251 is provided above the solenoid 276. The mounting portion 278 is formed in a plate shape parallel to the top plate portion 253 of the housing case body 251 and is fitted in the second guide groove 279 formed in the top plate portion 253 and the left side plate portion 256. These second guide grooves 279 face each other and extend in the front-rear direction, and the rear end thereof is open to the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The operating mechanism 275 is mounted by inserting the mounting portion 278 from the rear end side of the second guide groove 279 and pushing the solenoid 276. By inserting the mounting portion 278 into the second guide groove 279 in this way, the outer peripheral surface of the mounting portion 278 and the inner peripheral surface of the second guide groove 279 come into contact with each other. As a result, the movement of the operation mechanism 275 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction is restricted. By pushing the operating mechanism 275 along the second guide groove 279, the mounting portion 278 and the front plate portion 255 of the housing case body 251 come into contact with each other, and the movement of the pachinko machine 10 forward is restricted. The operation mechanism 275 is fixed to the storage case body 251 by fasteners such as screws in a state where movement in each direction is restricted in this way. In the present embodiment, the second guide groove 279 is provided in order to improve the mounting workability of the operation mechanism 275, but a configuration in which these are not provided may be provided.

The operating shaft 277 has an iron cylindrical portion 277a extending in the vertical direction. Most of the columnar portion 277a is housed inside the solenoid 276. The central axis of the cylindrical portion 277a and the central axis of the solenoid 276 overlap each other, and the operating axis 277 can move in the direction of the central axis of the solenoid 276. The lower end of the operating shaft 277 protrudes to the outside of the solenoid 276, and the lower end thereof has a plate-shaped shielding portion 277b and a crank portion 277c that offsets the shielding portion 277b from the operating shaft 277 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. It is integrally molded. In the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 277a, the shielding portion 277b, and the crank portion 277c of the operating shaft 277 are integrally molded, but they can also be molded individually. For example, it is preferable that only the columnar portion 277a is made of iron, and the shielding portion 277b and the crank portion 277c are made of synthetic resin.

The shielding portion 277b is formed substantially parallel to the front plate portion 255, and follows the vertical movement of the operating shaft 277 and moves in parallel with the front plate portion 255. Further, the shielding portion 277b is arranged so as to be on the front side of the detection device 265 by the crank portion 277c, and a gap for its operation is provided by the space formed between the detection device 265 and the front plate portion 255. The operating gap) is secured. The lower end of the shielding portion 277b abuts on the upper contact surface 271a at its lower limit position. In such a contact state, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap the light receiving element 267 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, it is in a state of covering the front side of the light receiving element 267. On the other hand, when the shielding portion 277b is in the upper limit position, the lower end portion of the shielding portion 277b is set to be above the light receiving element 267. In other words, it does not cover the front side of the light receiving element 267. A paint that absorbs light (paint with low light reflectance) is applied to the shield 277b so that the light from other light sources is not reflected by the shield 277b and reaches the light receiving element 267. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the shielding portion 277b is configured to overlap only the light receiving element 267, but it may be configured to overlap the light emitting element 266 or may be configured to overlap both the light receiving element 267 and the light emitting element 266. ..

In the present embodiment, the operating shaft 277 is held at the upper limit position of the operating range when power is supplied to the solenoid 276, in other words, at a position that does not cover the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter, also referred to as the first position). To. Here, the output of the solenoid 276 is set so large that the operating shaft 277 can be lifted against gravity in the energized state. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the operating shaft 277 is lowered by its own weight and is held at the lower limit position of the operating range, in other words, the position covering the front surface of the detection device 265 (hereinafter, also referred to as the second position). .. More specifically, when the shielding portion 277b comes into contact with the upper contact surface 271a, the operating shaft 277 is held at the second position. That is, in the operating shaft 277, the holding position changes between the first position and the second position depending on the presence or absence of power supply. In other words, the position of the shielding portion 277b is switched between the first position and the second position as the position of the operating shaft 277 is switched.

A predetermined gap region is set between the lower end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the first position and the upper end portion of the shielding portion 277b at the second position. In other words, the operating distance dimension of the operating shaft 277 is set to be larger than the axial length dimension of the shielding portion 277b, and the front plate portion 255 (detailedly overhanging) that overlaps the gap region in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. An insertion hole 260a that penetrates inside and outside (that is, in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10) is formed in a part of the portion 260). As shown in FIG. 6, the back surface of the front door frame 14 is provided with a protrusion 14b that can be inserted into the insertion hole 260a. The protrusion 14b is integrally molded with the front door frame 14 and extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The tip of the protrusion 14b is located slightly behind the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Since the protrusion 14b is provided on the front door frame 14 as described above, it moves with the rotation of the front door frame 14. That is, the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 13, and is not inserted into the insertion hole 260a when the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined amount or more. It becomes a state.

When the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a, that is, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the shielding portion 277b and the protrusion 14b come into contact with each other to position both the first position and the second position of the shielding portion 277b. Movement between is restricted. More specifically, when the shielding portion 277b is in the first position and the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the second position is restricted. Further, when the protrusion 14b is inserted while the shielding portion 277b is in the second position, the movement of the shielding portion 277b to the first position is restricted.

As described above, the front door frame 14 is rotatably provided with respect to the inner frame 13. Therefore, before the hook metal fitting 63 of the front door frame 14 and the bearing metal fitting 132 are in the locked state, the relative positions of the protrusion 14b, the shielding portion 277b, and the insertion hole 260a may vary. Therefore, there is a concern that the protrusions 14b and the like may be caught and the closing work of the front door frame 14 may be hindered. However, the protrusions 14b have a predetermined gap with the shielding portion 277b in both positions. At the same time, the insertion hole 260a has a tapered shape that widens toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, catching when the protrusion 14b is inserted is suppressed, and workability when the front door frame 14 is closed is ensured.

Next, the relative relationship between the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b will be described in detail. When the front door frame 14 is closed, the rear end of the protrusion 14b projects slightly rearward from the rear end of the shielding portion 277b. Therefore, even if the position of the front door frame 14 in the front-rear direction is slightly different, the function of the protrusion 14b is guaranteed. When the front door frame 14 is opened, the protrusion 14b moves to a position where the shielding portion 277b and the pachinko machine 10 do not overlap in a plan view by opening the front door frame 14 to a predetermined angle or more. As a result, the movement restriction (regulation) of the shielding portion 277b is released.

Further, an opening flange 13a extending in front of the pachinko machine 10, that is, toward the front door frame 14, is integrally formed on the peripheral edge of the inner frame 13. Due to the opening flange 13a, the peripheral edge portion of the inner frame 13 and the peripheral edge portion of the front door frame 14 overlap each other in the side view and the plan view of the pachinko machine 10. By making the two overlap each other in this way, the inconvenience that an illegal tool or the like is inserted from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is suppressed. The amount of overlap between the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b is set to be smaller than the amount of overlap between the opening flange 13a and the front door frame 14. More specifically, the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front surface of the shielding portion 277b to the rear end portion of the protrusion 14b is the distance dimension in the front-rear direction from the front end edge of the opening flange 13a to the rear end edge of the front door frame 14. Is also set small. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 rotates and the protrusion 14b and the shielding portion 277b do not overlap with each other, the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is not exposed by the opening flange 13a. That is, at a position where the front surface of the inner frame 13 can be visually recognized from the boundary portion between the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b by the protrusion 14b is released. ..

Next, the main configuration of the lid case body 280 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. The lid case body 280 has a top plate portion 281, a bottom plate portion 282, a back plate portion 283, a left side plate portion 284, and a right side plate portion 285, and has a box shape opened in front of the pachinko machine 10. The rear end opening edge of the storage case body 251 is housed in the open portion of the lid case body 280. Inside the lid case body 280, a relay board 286 electrically connected to the detection device 265 and the like by a harness (not shown) is arranged. The relay board 286 has a substantially plate shape parallel to the back plate portion 283, and is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate portion 283 by fasteners such as screws.

A communication hole 287 that penetrates inside and outside is formed behind the relay board 286, that is, at a portion of the back plate portion 283 facing the relay board 286. A connector 288 is arranged behind the communication hole 287. In other words, the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are provided so as to face each other with the communication hole 287 interposed therebetween, and the relay board 286 and the connector 288 are electrically connected by a harness or the like (not shown). The connector 288 is fixed to the back surface of the back plate portion 283 by fasteners such as screws with its insertion port facing the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The first monitoring device 250 and the main control device 300 are electrically connected to each other via a connector 288 by a harness (not shown). In the present embodiment, as described above, the lid case body 280 has a light transmissive structure, which facilitates confirmation of fraudulent activity on the first monitoring device 250. However, it is also possible that the lid case body 280 does not have light transmission. In this case, the case body 280 for the lid may be formed of, for example, a synthetic resin material having opacity or a light metal material such as aluminum.

Next, opening detection of the front door frame 14 in a state where electric power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
The solenoid 276 is excited when power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, that is, when the solenoid 276 is energized. As a result, the operating shaft 277 is held in the first position. In such a state, the shielding portion 277b does not exist in front of the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 reaches the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274. When the light reaches the light receiving element 267, the light receiving signal is output to the relay board 286, and by reading this light receiving signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

When the front door frame 14 is opened while power is being supplied to the first monitoring device 250, the relative positions of both elements 266 and 267 and the light reflecting member 274 change. In this case, the light emitted from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light reflecting member 274, or even if it reaches the light reflecting member 274, the reflected light is emitted toward a portion other than the light receiving element 267. Therefore, the light from the light emitting element 266 does not reach the light receiving element 267. Therefore, a predetermined light receiving signal is not output. Then, by reading the change in the received light signal, it is detected that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state.

In this way, by making it possible to detect the opening of the front door frame 14 while the electric power is being supplied, it is possible to suppress the unauthorized opening of the front door frame 14 during the business of the hall. As a result, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of fraud against the pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the supply of electric power to the first monitoring device 250 is stopped due to the closing of the store, a power failure, or the like, the supply of electric power to the solenoid 276 is stopped, so that the excited state is released. In this case, the operating shaft 277 and the shielding portion 277b move downward due to their own weight and come into contact with the protrusion 14b. When the shielding portion 277b comes into contact with the protrusion 14b, the downward movement thereof is restricted, and the movement to the second position is restricted. When the power supply is started again in this state, the solenoid 276 is in an excited state, and the operating shaft 277 is lifted upward by overcoming its own weight action. In this case, since the light from the light emitting element 266 can reach the light receiving element 267, it can be detected that the front door frame 14 is in the closed state. In this way, it is detected that the front door frame 14 was not opened while the power supply was stopped.

Next, a case where the front door frame 14 is opened and closed while the power supply is stopped will be described.
As the front door frame 14 is opened, the protrusion 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, so that the shielding portion 277b loses its support and moves downward (that is, the second position) by its own weight. When the shielding portion 277b moves downward, it comes into contact with the upper contact surface 271a, and further downward movement is restricted. When the front door frame 14 is closed again in this state, the protrusion 14b returns to the original position (the state in which the protrusion 14b is inserted into the insertion hole 260a), so that the upward movement of the shielding portion 277b is restricted. In this state, the shielding portion 277b is located in front of the light receiving element 267, and its vertical movement is restricted by the protrusion 14b and the upper contact surface 271a. By making the shielding portion 277b immovable from the second position in this way, the fact that the front door frame 14 has been opened is mechanically preserved.

When the power supply is started while the movement of the shielding portion 277b from the second position is restricted, the solenoid 276 is excited and the shielding portion 277b tries to move upward (that is, the first position). However, the shielding portion 277b hits the protrusion 14b and its movement is hindered. That is, the state in which the light receiving element 267 is still covered by the shielding portion 277b is continued. When the power supply is started, the light emitting element 266 starts to emit light. The light emitted from the light emitting element 266 is emitted toward the light receiving element 267 via the light reflecting member 274. However, the shielding portion 277b located in front of the light receiving element 267 blocks the arrival of light at the light receiving element 267. Therefore, it is detected that the output of the light receiving signal is suppressed and the front door frame 14 is in an open state. Actually, the front door frame 14 is in the closed state, but it is detected that the front door frame 14 is opened when the power is cut off.

As described above, by opening the front door frame 14 again in the state where the opening of the front door frame 14 when the power is cut off is detected, the protrusion 14b is separated from the first monitoring device 250, and the shielding portion 277b is in the first position. Move to. That is, the movement restriction of the shielding portion 277b is released. By operating the front door frame 14 in this way, the unauthorized opening detection state is released and the normal state is restored. Further, with such a configuration, since the unauthorized opening detection state is reset by opening the front door frame 14, it is not necessary to provide a reset switch or the like, which contributes to simplification of the configuration. Further, since the front door frame 14 is opened by a predetermined operation (locking / unlocking operation), it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the unauthorized opening detection state is illegally released.

Similar to the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290 also includes a housing case body 251, a lid case body 280, a detection device 265, an operation mechanism 275, a relay board 286, and a connector 288, and the second monitoring device 290 is also provided. A protrusion and a light reflecting member corresponding to the device 290 are provided on the outer frame 11.

In the above description, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 are configured to detect that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened even when the power supply is not supplied (specifically). However, a configuration in which it is detected that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened when the power supply is not supplied is essential for this embodiment. It suffices to have a configuration in which it is detected that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened while power is being supplied. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 may be provided with a detection device 265 for detecting the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13.

In the above description, whether or not the detection device 265 includes a light emitting element 266 and a light receiving element 267, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is reflected by the light reflecting member 274, and the reflected light can be received by the light receiving element 267. Therefore, the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected. However, in the present embodiment, it suffices if the open / closed state of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be detected. Therefore, for example, when the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at opposite positions on the back side of the resin base 71 and the front door frame 14, respectively, and the front door frame 14 is closed, the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 is emitted. Can be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the front door frame 14 is open. Similarly, for the detection of opening / closing of the inner frame 13, the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267 are provided at opposite positions on the front side of the resin base 71 and the inner frame 13, respectively, and the inner frame 13 is closed. The light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may be received by the light receiving element 267, and the light emitted by the light emitting element 266 may not be received by the light receiving element 267 when the inner frame 13 is open.

Further, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 is detected by using the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, but the front door frame 14 and the inner frame are detected by another method. The opening / closing of 13 may be detected. For example, an ultrasonic oscillating element may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and an ultrasonic receiving element may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening and closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 10, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15, but the back pack unit 15 is provided. Various mechanisms can be adopted to detect the opening of the. For example, similarly to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290, the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15 may be detected by using the optical elements of the light emitting element 266 and the light receiving element 267, instead of the light emitting element 266. An ultrasonic oscillation element may be provided in the back pack unit 15 and an ultrasonic reception element may be provided in place of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15. Further, a magnet may be provided instead of the light emitting element 266, and a magnetic sensor may be provided instead of the light receiving element 267 to detect the opening / closing of the back pack unit 15, or a mechanical contact sensor may be provided. May be good.

<Electrical configuration>
FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 17, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 300, a voice emission control device 400, and a display control device 500. These devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13. Further, the pachinko machine 10 supplies necessary power to the payout control device 242 and the pachinko machine 10 that execute the payout control for causing the above-mentioned payout device 224 to pay out the game ball, and also supplies a power source for controlling the game ball launch mechanism 110. A launch control device 243 is provided, and these devices are mounted on the back pack unit 15.

The main control device 300 includes a main control board 301 that controls the main control (main control) of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring board 303 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 300 includes a board box for accommodating the main control board 301 and the like. The substrate box may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as a trace means, a substrate box is formed by connecting a plurality of case bodies, and a connecting portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion when separating each case body is provided or peeled off. At this time, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which a sealing seal that leaves a trace of peeling due to the adhesive layer remaining on the bonding target is attached so as to straddle the boundary between a plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a configuration in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between these case bodies can be adopted.

The main control board 301 includes an MPU (Micro-Processing Unit) 302 mounted on the main control board 301, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 312 and a RAM (Random Access Memory) 313 constituting the MPU 302. There is. The MPU 302 is a semiconductor element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, etc. are integrated into one chip in addition to the ROM 312 and the RAM 313, and is a so-called one-chip microcomputer. be. In the present embodiment, the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 302, but the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 may be individually chipped. Further, although the ROM 312 and the RAM 313 are physically separated separate memories, one memory that is not physically separated may be used, and the ROM 312 area and the RAM 313 area may be provided by a logical address. .. In this case, for example, a specific area in the RAM may be write-protected so that the ROM function may be provided. The same applies to the MPUs of other control devices other than the main control device 300.

The ROM 312 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, and is used as the main storage device of the MPU 302. The ROM 312 is a non-volatile memory that does not require external power supply for holding stored information (data), and is a semiconductor element that cannot be written. The ROM 312 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, for example, a pass / fail table storage area, a distribution table storage area, a reach table storage area, a variable table storage area, and the like. It has various areas. These areas will be described in detail later.

The RAM 313 is a semiconductor memory capable of arbitrarily writing and erasing information. The RAM 313 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when reading and executing a control program stored in the ROM 312, and requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is a volatile memory. The RAM 313 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and for example, various areas such as various counter areas, hold ball storage areas, electric service hold areas, and stop result storage areas. Have. These areas will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, a volatile memory such as a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) or a SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) is used as the RAM 313, but the RAM 313 is a MRAM (Magnetoresistive Memory) MRAM (Magnetoresistive Memory) May be used. In the present embodiment, even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the RAM 313 is supplied with power for data storage and holding from the power / launch control board provided in the power / launch control device 243 to hold the data. It is composed.

The MPU 302 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the MPU 302 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 303 provided in the main control device 300 and the plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156. The output port of the MPU 302 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 303, the payout control device 242, and the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 connected to the voice emission control device 400 will be described in detail later. Further, the output port of the MPU 302 has a main display, an electric accessory drive unit 84b2 for opening and closing the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b, and a variable winning drive unit 83c for opening / closing the opening / closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83. It is connected to the unit 93 and the display unit 94 for accessories.

Here, the main control board 301 has a driver circuit (not shown), and the MPU 302 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the electric service open state, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 84b2 to open and close the opening / closing member 84b1. Further, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c to open / close the opening / closing door 83b of the variable winning device 83. Further, in each game round, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the main display unit 93 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the starting ports 84a and 84b. Further, the MPU 302 executes display control of the accessory display unit 94 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85.

The power failure monitoring board 303 relays between the main control board 301 and the power supply / emission control device 243 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. .. The MPU 302 receives electric power (DC24V) via the power failure monitoring board 303. Further, the MPU 302 performs winning determination (ball entry determination) to various winning openings 82 to 84b, out openings 87, and each through gate 85 based on the detection results of the detection sensors 152 to 156. The MPU 302 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination to the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b.

The payout control device 242 is a prize ball (a game ball obtained by winning a prize) or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player) to the payout device 224 based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 300. Executes the payout control to make the payout.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. The power supply / emission control device 243 includes an AC-DC converter that generates operating power required for each of the main control board 301, the payout control device 242, and the like based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply. The generated operating power is supplied to each device. The power supply / emission control device 243 includes a power supply unit for power failure such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power failure supplies power for storage and holding to the RAM 313 of the main control device 300 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The power supply / launch control device 243 executes launch control for launching the game ball to the game ball launch mechanism 110. Here, the game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a launch rail extending toward the guide rail 103 of the game board 81, a ball feeding device for supplying the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 onto the launch rail, and a launch rail. It is equipped with a solenoid, which is an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied to the guide rail 103 toward the guide rail 103. When the power supply / launch control device 243 and the predetermined launch conditions (when the launch handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the launch stop switch 41b is off) are met, this solenoid is used. The drive signal (launch permission signal) is supplied to launch the game ball.

In the present embodiment, the gaming ball launching mechanism 110 of the pachinko machine 10 adopts a method of launching a gaming ball by a linear expansion / contraction operation of a plunger type solenoid, but it is directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid. It may be a form in which a hitting mallet operates to launch a game ball, or a form in which a hitting mallet supported at a different position operates with respect to the rotation of a motor to launch a game ball. Specifically, in the method of launching a game ball by a motor, the motor and the hitting mallet are supported at different positions, and the hitting mallet is operated by rotating the cam connected to the motor. The hitting mallet operated by the motor (cam) hits the game ball by operating in the opposite direction due to the elasticity of the connected spring or the like, and launches it into the game area 104 of the game board 81. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the rotary solenoid, the game ball is hit by rotating the rotation axis in response to the pulse from the power supply / launch control device 243, and the game ball is moved to the game area 104 of the game board 81. Be fired. The hitting mallet directly connected to the rotation axis of the rotary solenoid hits the game ball on the launch rail by rotating to the support position of the game ball, and the game ball is launched. After hitting the ball, the torque of the rotary solenoid disappears, and the hitting mallet rotates in the opposite direction due to the reaction of the collision with the stopper and its own weight, and the stopper stops the ball at the position before the operation. Further, in the method of launching the game ball by the plunger type solenoid, the ball hammer is directly connected to the movable iron core of the plunger type solenoid, and the game ball is hit by the linear reciprocating operation of the mallet, and the game area 104 of the game board 81 is used. A game ball is fired. In addition, the plunger type solenoid is a type that launches a hitting mallet by energizing the solenoid, and a type that compresses the spring by retracting the hitting mallet by energizing, and advances the hitting mallet by the elasticity of the spring to hit the game ball. Either may be used.

Further, the ball feeding device of the game ball launching mechanism 110 may be either a mechanical type or a magnet type. In the case of the mechanical type, the ball feeding device is operated by using the power of the motor that drives the hitting mallet. In the case of the mechanical type, since the driving source of the hitting mallet and the ball feeding device is the same, the game ball is supplied to the launching rail one by one according to the timing of the hitting ball with a simple structure. Is possible. Further, in the case of the magnet type, the ball feed is operated by an independent solenoid separately from the operation of the hammer, and the ball game balls are supplied one by one onto the launch rail. The magnet type is preferably adopted when the game ball launching mechanism 110 launches a game ball using a rotary solenoid or a plunger type solenoid.

The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 are connected to the main control board 301 via a built-in relay board (not shown). The first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 operate by receiving power supplied from the main control board 301.

<Internal lottery>
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery. The "internal lottery" is a specific game state (big hit game state) that is advantageous to the player when the game ball is won in the start winning openings (first and second starting openings 84a and 84b) provided on the game board. It is a lottery as to whether or not to transfer. As shown in FIG. 19, the MPU 302 executes an internal lottery or the like by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 302 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and when the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 is used for the jackpot type lottery, and a lottery for whether or not to generate a reach display. The reach random number counter C3 is used for. Further, the MPU 302 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variable type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 93 and the symbol display device 91. Further, the MPU 302 uses the electric accessory opening counter C4 for a lottery as to whether or not the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b is opened. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas (see FIG. 19) of the RAM 313.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added (incremented) to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching a predetermined maximum value, it returns to 0. Each counter is updated periodically (eg, every 4 msec). The updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is the timing at which the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area (see FIG. 19) provided in the RAM 313 as the acquisition information storage means. Further, among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is stored in the electric service holding area (see FIG. 19) of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 85. To.

The holding ball storage area includes a holding area Ra for the first result display unit, a holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and an execution area AE.

The first result display unit holding area Ra provided as the first acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 84a. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4. Specifically, the MPU 302 holds information in the order of first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4 when winning the first starting port 84a occurs a plurality of times in succession. To store.

In the present embodiment, since the holding area Ra for the first result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the first starting port 84a are held. There is. Further, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holds, which is the number of sets of each value of the hold random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of reserved pieces related to the first starting port 84a is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, any one of one to three or five or more.

The second result display unit holding area Rb provided as the second acquired information storage means includes four storage areas of the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing one set of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 302 uses a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 as hold information in chronological order in each area Rb1 to Rb4 according to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b. That is, the values acquired earlier are sequentially stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4. Specifically, the MPU 302 holds information in the order of first area Rb1 → second area Rb2 → third area Rb3 → fourth area Rb4 when winning a prize in the second starting port 84b occurs a plurality of times in succession. Will be stored in chronological order.

In the present embodiment, since the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has four storage areas, up to four winning balls for the second starting port 84b are held. There is. Further, the holding area Rb for the second result display unit has a storage area for writing the number of holdings, which is the number of sets of each value of the holding jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is provided. The number of reserved pieces related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, any one of one to three or five or more.

When the execution area AE starts the variable display of the result display units 461 and 462, the execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. It is an area for moving.

Since the electric service holding area has four storage areas, a maximum of four game balls can be held for each through gate 85. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with two through gates 85, but regardless of which through gate 85 is won, if one of the through gates 85 is won, the through gate 85 will be placed in the electric service holding area. The winning of the game ball is suspended. The number of reserved pieces related to the second starting port 84b is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be, for example, any one of one to three or five or more.

<Explanation of each counter>
Next, the details of each counter will be described.
<Electric accessory release counter C4>
First, the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 becomes a loop counter that loops in the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 250, and then returning to 0. ing. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is used as the electric function of the RAM 313 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in each through gate 85. Stored in the hold area. The MPU 302 draws a lottery (electric accessory opening lottery) as to whether or not to open the opening / closing member 84b1 of the second starting port 84b based on the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area. Execute.

<Support mode>
Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of modes (hereinafter, support modes) in which the frequency with which the opening / closing member 84b1 that allows the game ball to win a prize in the second starting port 84b is opened is different from each other. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 84b1 in the open state is relatively low, and a high-frequency support mode in which the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 84b1 in the open state is relatively high. And have.

In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state is the same (for example, both are 4/5) in the electric accessory opening lottery, but the high-frequency support mode is the low-frequency support mode. As compared with the above, when the electric service open state is won, the opening / closing member 84b1 is set to the open state more often, and the opening time for setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the open state is also longer. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the closed state during each opening in the one-time electric service opening state is shorter than the opening time per opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is the minimum secured time (role) that is secured as the waiting time from the end of the electric accessory opening lottery to the next electric accessory opening lottery. The duration of one variable display on the physical display unit 94) is shortened.

In the high frequency support mode, the game ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 84b as compared with the low frequency support mode. That is, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball has a higher probability of winning the first starting port 84a than the second starting port 84b, and in the high frequency support mode, the game ball has a second higher probability than the first starting port 84a. The probability of winning a prize in the starting port 84b is high. Further, when the winning of the second starting port 84b is detected by the detection sensor 154b, a predetermined number (for example, two) of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play the game. You can play with almost no reduction in the number of balls.

The low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to the above. For example, the high-frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric accessory opening lottery as compared with the low-frequency support mode. Further, for example, a plurality of types of reservation times may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured so that a shorter reservation time can be easily selected as compared with the low frequency support mode, and the average of the selection time is selected. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times the opening / closing member 84b1 is set to the open state, the opening time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode compares the frequency of setting the opening / closing member 84b1 to the open state with the low frequency support mode. It may be configured to be relatively high. Further, the types of support modes are not limited to two types, and may be arbitrary, and may be, for example, three or more types.

<Big hit random number counter>
Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 599, and then returning to 0. .. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 599, similarly to the jackpot random number counter C1.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 and the random number initial value counter CINI to determine the next value (initial value) when the final value of the sequence of random numbers is expressed by a value with contingency. A big hit lottery will be held according to the method. Specifically, in the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number progresses from the initial value 0 when the power is turned on, and when the count progresses to the maximum value 599, the next value does not become 0 and the random number initial. The value acquired from the value counter CINI is the initial value. Here, assuming that 100 is acquired from the random number initial value counter CINI as the initial value, the jackpot random number counter C1 advances counting to 100, 101, 102, and when counting to 599, returns to 0 and advances counting to 99. , The initial value is acquired again from the random number initial value counter CINI random. That is, in this method, since the initial value is changed every time the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the periodicity does not appear at the timing when a specific random number appears.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (win / fail lottery) for generating a big hit based on the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the values of random numbers that win the jackpot generation. Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot generation is, as shown in FIG. It is remembered.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two winning / failing lottery modes: a low-probability mode (low-probability state) in which it is difficult to win a big hit, and a high-probability mode (high-probability state) in which a big hit is easy to win. .. The pass / fail tables are the pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) shown in FIG. 20 (a) and the pass / fail table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 20 (b) (high probability pass / fail information). Group) and. The MPU 302 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot by comparing these hit / miss tables with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

These win / fail tables have the results (win / fail results) of a plurality of jackpot occurrences of "big hit win", "special miss result", and "normal miss result". Specifically, under the gaming state (low probability state) in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 20A, a random number that becomes a "big hit winning". The value of is two. Further, under the gaming state (high probability state) in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 20B, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" is There are 21 pieces. Here, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot winning stored in the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit winning" stored in the winning / failing table for the high probability mode.

The value and number of random numbers stored in each winning / failing table are arbitrary, and it is sufficient that the high probability mode has a higher probability of becoming a "big hit win" than the low probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the high probability mode does not include the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode. It may also include a part of the value of the random number that becomes the "big hit win" stored in the win / fail table for the low probability mode.

In addition, in each winning / losing lottery mode, other than the value of the random number that is the "big hit winning", the big hit is not won and the result is lost. Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of deviation results, a "special deviation result (small hit result)" and a "normal deviation result". All of these deviation results are common in that they do not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode. However, the "special deviation result" is different in that it does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode, whereas the "normal deviation result" does not trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value of 29, and then returning to 0. .. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (sorting lottery) of the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the value of a random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type. As shown in FIG. 21, the value of the random number related to the distribution destination of the jackpot type is stored in the distribution table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312 provided as the distribution information group storage means. It is stored as an information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21 (a) and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 21 (b). ing.
The MPU 302 executes a lottery of the jackpot type by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The first distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the first starting port 84a. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the first distribution table includes "low probability result (special distribution result corresponding to low probability)" and "unspecified small round high probability result (latent high probability result corresponding to small round)". ) ”,“ Explicit small round high probability result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as the distribution destination. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results", and "10 to 14". (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Unspecified low round high probability result", "15-19" (Probability 1/6) is assigned to "Explicit small round high probability result", and "20 to 29" (Probability). 1/3) is assigned to the "most advantageous result".

The second distribution table is for the value of the jackpot type counter C2 shifted from the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning of the second starting port 84b. This is a table that is referred to when a lottery of the type of jackpot is performed. As shown in FIG. 21B, the second distribution table has two distribution results, "low probability result" and "most advantageous result", as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values "0 to 29" of the jackpot type counter C2, "0 to 9" (probability 1/3) is distributed to "low probability results" and "10 to 29". "(Probability 2/3) is assigned to the" most advantageous result ".

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / fail lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (2) Support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (3) Mode of open / close control of the variable winning device 83 in the open / close execution mode

First, the difference in the winning / failing lottery mode of (1) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. "Unspecified small round high probability result", "Explicit small round high probability result", and "Most advantageous result" have a high probability of winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the winning / failing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a "big win" is achieved in the winning or losing lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode of (2) will be described. The "low probability result" is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of game rounds reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times).

The "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is a distribution result in which the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is maintained as it is. Here, if the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode continues at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / failing lottery. The "explicit small round high accuracy result" and the "most advantageous result" are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode regardless of the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. This high-frequency support mode continues until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

The difference in the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 83 in the opening / closing execution mode of (3) will be described in detail later.

<Reach random number counter>
Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically (for example, every 4 msec), and the updated value is passed through the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b. Is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 313. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start port 84a, and the game ball is stored in the second start port 84b. It is stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit of the RAM 313 at the timing of winning. Then, the MPU 302 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate the reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area.

The MPU 302 compares the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area with the reach table when the result is a "normal loss result" without being a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery. , A lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed, and when the reach display is generated in this lottery, the reach display is generated. The reach table is information on the value of a random number related to the occurrence of the reach display, and is stored in the reach table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312.

Here, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution lottery is distributed to the "most advantageous result", the symbol display device 91 stops the same odd number or the same even number. The combination of symbols having is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, when the result is a "big hit" in the winning / failing lottery and the result is sorted into a "low probability result" in the sorting lottery, the symbol display device 91 stops the combination of symbols having the same even number as a stop result. Stop display on the symbol valid line L. Furthermore, if the winning / fail lottery is a "big win" and the lottery is divided into "unspecified small round high probability result" or "explicit small round high probability result", or if the winning / losing lottery is "big hit winning". If the result is a "special deviation result", the symbol display device 91 is selected when the stop result is not a combination of symbols having the same number but a "normal deviation result" in the winning / failing lottery. A combination of special symbols having different numbers that do not exist is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

Reach display is when the combination of symbols with the same number is finally stopped and displayed (it becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / failing lottery, and it is divided into "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the distribution lottery. In the case of), it occurs regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is when the combination of special symbols is finally stopped and displayed (“big hit winning” in the winning / failing lottery, and “unspecified small round high probability result” or “explicit small round high” in the distribution lottery. It does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the case of being sorted into "probability result" or in the case of "special loss result" without being "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery.

The mode of reach display is a specific symbol display column among a plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 (in this embodiment, the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3). The reach state (reach) is changed by displaying the stop on the effective line L of the stop symbol and the remaining symbol display column (in this embodiment, the symbol display column Z2) is displayed in a variable manner (reach display). It is configured so that the player can recognize that it has occurred. Specifically, the reach display is a combination of symbols in which the same decorative figure is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z1 and the symbol display column Z3, for example, "1 ・ ↓ ・ 1", "2 ・ ↓ ・ 2" ("↓"). "" Means that it is changing). Further, the symbols of the specific symbol display columns (symbol display column Z1 and symbol display column Z3) forming the reach display are in the state of temporary stop display, and the remaining symbol display columns (symbol display column Z2) have decorative patterns. After the stop display (temporary stop display) is displayed, the decorative figures in all the symbol display columns are fixedly stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 91, before displaying a predetermined stop result, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit win" in the winning / losing lottery and sorts. It is possible to expect the player to be assigned to the "low probability result" or the "most advantageous result" in the lottery. The mode of reach display is not limited to this, and after stopping and displaying a part of the symbol strings, the remaining symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background. Alternatively, each symbol string may be reduced or hidden, and then a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G.

In the present embodiment, the main control board 301 of the main control device 300 is provided with the reach random number counter C3, and the MPU 302 is stored in the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 and the hold ball storage area. By comparing with the value of the reach random number counter C3, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 300, but the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 400. It may be configured to be executed.

<Expected production>
The pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 91. The expected effect is to make the player expect that the winning / failing lottery will be a "big hit" after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 91 and before the predetermined stop result is displayed. Refers to the production. The above-mentioned reach display is also an expected effect that occurs when the result is a “normal loss result” without being a “big hit” in the winning / failing lottery. It has a kind of expected production. Since the reach display has already been described, the notice display will be described below.

<Notice display>
The notice display will not be a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery if it becomes a "big hit win" in the win / fail lottery, or if it becomes a "special loss result" without becoming a "big hit win" in the win / loss lottery. This is an expected production that makes it easier to generate the production than when the result is "normally out of order". This notice display may make it easier to select an effect having a low appearance rate, or may combine these, instead of making it easier to generate the effect. In the present embodiment, the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the main control device 300, while the lottery for whether or not to generate the notice display is performed by the voice emission control device 400. Is executed.

In the mode of the notice display, all the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 are variablely displayed, or some of the symbol columns are displayed in a variable manner. In a situation where (for example, the symbol display column Z1) is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L and a plurality of symbol columns (for example, the symbol display columns Z2 and Z3) are variablely displayed, a predetermined character or the like is displayed. It is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. This notice display occurs in both the case where the reach display is generated and the case where the reach display is not generated, but it is set so that it is more likely to occur when the reach display is generated than when the reach display is not generated. Has been done. The notice display is not limited to this, and for example, the background may be changed and the notice display may be displayed by changing the form of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3.

Finally, the variable type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 198, and then returning to 0. .. The variation type counter CS is updated at least once for each execution of the normal processing described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed. Then, the MPU 302 determines the display duration of the symbol on the main display unit 93 and the symbol on the symbol display device 91 based on the comparison between the variation table and the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Determine the display duration. The variable table is information on the value of a random number related to the display duration, and is stored in the variable table storage area (see FIG. 17) of the ROM 312 as described above.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, random numbers are generated by a counter circuit (counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, C4) which is a random number generation IC, but program control by software (so-called soft random numbers) is performed. ), It is possible to count at extremely high speed. Also, in the case of soft random numbers, since they are processed as part of the program control of the game machine, it becomes a burden on the software under the limited memory space, but in the case of hard random numbers, random numbers are generated by the hardware. As a result, it is possible to generate a random number having a count value several times that of the soft random number without imposing a burden on the software.

<About various processes executed by the main control device 300>
The MPU 302 of the main control device 300 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for advancing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing will be described in order. The MPU 302 executes timer interrupt processing, normal processing, and main processing, as well as NMI interrupt processing that is activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal), but the description of this processing will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing. In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 302 periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) executes steps S101 to S108, as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 302 reads the states (detection states) of the plurality of detection sensors 152 to 156, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 313 as winning detection information. The MPU 302 has determined that the detection sensors 152 to 154b provided in the various winning openings of the general winning opening 82, the first starting opening 84a, the second starting opening 84b, and the large winning opening 83a have detected the winning of the game ball. In this case, a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball is set, and this set command is transmitted to the payout control device 242. For example, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the variable winning device 83 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 302 transmits a prize ball command instructing the payout of 13 prize balls to the payout control device 242. do.
Further, in step S101, the MPU 302 reads a signal (light receiving signal) input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289. The information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of MPU 302. In this case, the MPU 302 is provided with at least the first register to the third register, the signal information of the first monitoring device 250 is stored and held in the first register, and the signal information of the second monitoring device 290 is the second. The signal of the back pack unit open detector 289 is stored and held in the register, and the signal of the back pack unit open detector 289 is stored and held in the third register. This also applies to the following description regarding the registers of the MPU 302.

In step S102, the front door frame opening monitoring process is executed. In the front door frame opening monitoring process, processing related to monitoring the opening of the front door frame 14 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source is executed based on an input signal from the first monitoring device 250. The details of the front door frame opening monitoring process will be described later.

In step S103, the inner frame opening monitoring process is executed. In the inner frame opening monitoring process, processing related to monitoring the opening of the gaming machine main body 12, in other words, the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is supplied from an external power source based on an input signal from the second monitoring device 290 is performed. Execute. The details of the inner frame opening monitoring process will be described later.

In step S104, the back pack release detection process is executed. In the back pack open detection process, based on the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289, the back pack unit 15 open detection process is executed in a situation where power is supplied from an external power source. Specifically, it is determined whether the input signal (input voltage) from the back pack unit open detector 289 is LOW or HIGH. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes LOW, and when the back pack unit 15 is opened, the back pack unit 15 is opened. The input signal from the unit open detector 289 is HIGH, but a different method may be used. For example, when the back pack unit 15 is not opened, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH, and when the back pack unit 15 is open, the input signal from the back pack unit open detector 289 becomes HIGH. May be LOW. When the release of the back pack unit 15 is detected in step S104, the MPU 302 sets the back pack unit release command in the RAM 313. The back pack unit release command set in the RAM 313 is transmitted from the main control device 300 (MPU302) to the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402).

In step S105, the MPU 302 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the MPU 302 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. If the MPU 302 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI is returned to 0.

In step S106, the MPU 302 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 302 is updated by adding 1 to the previous values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4, respectively. The latter value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. If the MPU 302 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous values of the counters C1 to C4, the values of the counters C1 to C4 are returned to 0. Further, the jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every time it loops once.

In step S107, the MPU 302 executes a winning process for thru. Specifically, when the MPU 302 determines that the detection sensor 155 provided in each through gate 85 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 302 elects the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S106. Store in the role hold area. Further, the MPU 302 sets a command to execute a variable display of the symbol of the character display unit 94, and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 85 on the character display unit 94. Let me. Based on the command instruction in the MPU 302, the accessory display unit 94 performs a blinking and fluctuating variable display that turns on and off in sequence, and finally the lighting position (stop) in which the accessory display unit 94 is definitively lit. The command is displayed by (result). Further, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the third hold lamp unit 96, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 turns on the third hold lamp unit 96 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302. The maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the through gate 85 is 4, and the third hold lamp unit 96 lights up in the same number as the number of hold balls.

In step S108, the MPU 302 executes a winning process for the starting port. Hereinafter, the winning process for the starting port will be described in detail.

<Prize processing for starting port>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the winning process for the starting port.
In step S201, whether the MPU 302 has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 84a based on whether or not the detection sensor 154a provided in the first starting port 84a has detected the entry of the game ball. Judge whether or not. When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 84a (YES), the MPU 302 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit in step S202. The reserved number is set as the first start reserved storage number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Ra for the first result display unit. After that, the MPU 302 processes the steps after step S205.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won in the first starting port 84a (NO), in the MPU 302, in step S203, the detection sensor 154b provided in the second starting port 84b is the game ball. Based on whether or not the ball has been detected, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 84b. When it is determined in step S203 that the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting opening 84b (NO), the MPU 302 ends the winning process for the starting opening. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 84b (YES), the MPU 302 grasps the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit in step S204. Then, the reserved number is set as the second start reserved storage number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the reserved area Rb for the second result display unit. After that, the MPU 302 processes the steps after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, in step S205, the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is. When the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is not less than the upper limit value (NO), the MPU 302 ends the winning process for the start port. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S205 that the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value (YES), 1 is added to the value of the start hold storage number N (RaN or RbN) in step S206. Update.

In step S207, the MPU 302 sets each set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the hold area for the result display unit. It is stored as hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the start hold storage number N updated in step S206.

For example, when the first start hold storage number RaN is set in step S202, the MPU 302 has the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process. The set is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 302 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206 when “3” is set in the first start hold storage number RaN in step S202. 4 Hold information is stored in the area Ra4.

Further, for example, in the MPU 302, when the second start hold storage number RbN is set in step S204, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt processing. The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area of the free storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. For example, the MPU 302 is a storage area corresponding to "4" of the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206 when "3" is set in the second start hold storage number RbN in step S204. 4 Hold information is stored in the area Rb4.

Further, in step S207, the MPU 302 sets a command for instructing the lighting of the first hold lamp unit 95a or the second hold lamp unit 95b, and transmits this set command to the voice emission control device 400. After that, the MPU 302 ends the winning process for the starting port. The voice emission control device 400 turns on the first hold lamp unit 95a or the second hold lamp unit 95b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 302. Further, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of game balls that have won a prize in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b is four. Further, the first holding lamp unit 95a or the second holding lamp unit 95b is lit by the same number (corresponding) as the number of holding lamps.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing. The normal process is the main process for advancing the game. Specifically, the MPU 302 periodically executes steps S301 to S309 in a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S308 to S311 when the remaining time occurs, and steps S312 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S308. Execute. The "residual time" is the remaining time obtained by subtracting the time required for the processing of steps S301 to S309 from the cycle time (4 msec).

In step S301, the MPU 302 executes an external output process of transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the prize ball command is set, and if it is determined that the prize ball command is set, the MPU 302 transmits the prize ball command to the payout control device 242. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a command for the effect such as a command corresponding to the effect for the game round or a command corresponding to the effect for the open / close execution mode is set, and determines whether or not a command for the effect is set. If it is determined that the command of is set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400.

In step S302, the MPU 302 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, the MPU 302 is updated by adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, and the updated value is stored in the lottery counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 313. If the MPU 302 has reached the maximum value when 1 is added to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 302 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0.

In step S303, the MPU 302 executes a game turn control process for advancing the game turn. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a win / fail lottery and a distribution lottery, determines information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 91, and finally causes the main display unit 93 to stop and display the symbol. Make decisions about such information.

In step S304, the MPU 302 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes a transition process to each gaming state such as an open / close execution mode, a high probability mode, and a high frequency support mode. The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

In step S305, the MPU 302 executes the demo display execution determination process. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting a demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round, and starts the game. If it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed, a demo command for starting the demo display is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 starts the demo display execution process based on the demo command transmitted from the MPU 302. This demo display execution process will be described in detail later.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the start waiting period has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S305 is executed. For example, if the start waiting period is 3 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S305 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of times the process of step S305 is executed and reaches 3000 times, the start waiting period. Is determined to have passed. The configuration for measuring the start waiting period is arbitrary, and for example, the start waiting period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). Further, if the MPU 302 starts a new game round while counting the number of executions of the process of step S305, the MPU 302 resets the value of the count.

In step S306, the MPU 302 executes a process of executing opening / closing control of the opening / closing member 84b1 provided in the second starting port 84b (hereinafter referred to as an electric service support process). Specifically, when the MPU 302 executes the electric bonus opening lottery based on the value of the electric bonus opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area of the RAM 313 and wins the electric bonus opening lottery, The opening / closing process of the opening / closing member 84b1 is executed. Further, the MPU 302 executes display control of the accessory display unit 94 so as to display the result of the electric accessory opening lottery.

In step S307, the MPU 302 executes the game ball launch control process. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes launch control for launching a game ball to the power supply / launch control device 243 based on the player's rotation operation so that the player rotates the launch handle 41 clockwise (clockwise). Let me. More specifically, the power supply / launch control device 243 excites the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) to cause the game ball launch mechanism 110 to launch the game ball. The solenoid is excited to launch the game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 41. Specifically, the larger the amount of rotation of the firing handle 41, the stronger the excitation, so that the firing strength of the game ball becomes stronger. The power supply / launch control device 243 launches a game ball when predetermined launch conditions (when the launch handle 41 is rotated, the touch sensor 41a is on, and the launch stop switch 41b is off) are met. A drive signal is output to the solenoid of the mechanism 110 to launch the game ball.

In step S308, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 313. The power failure flag is set in the RAM 313 by inputting a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring board 303 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 302. When the power failure monitoring board 303 confirms the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure monitoring board 303 outputs this power failure signal. This power failure flag is cleared when the next main process is executed.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as RAM 313, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by substituting 1 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313, and clears the power failure flag by substituting 0 in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S308 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the power failure processing after step S312 without executing the processing after step S309. Specifically, in step S312, the MPU 302 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S313, the MPU 302 calculates and stores the RAM determination value (checksum of the RAM 313). In step S314, the MPU 302 prohibits access to the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 continues an infinite loop until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S308 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), whether or not the timing for executing the next normal processing has been reached in step S309, that is, from the time when the current normal processing is started. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 4 msec) has elapsed. When the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not been reached (NO), that is, when the periodic time of 4 msec has not elapsed and the remaining time has occurred, in step S310. , The random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S311, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 302 repeatedly executes the processes of steps S308 to S311 until it is determined in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (4 msec, which is the cycle time, has elapsed).

When the MPU 302 determines in step S309 that the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached (YES), that is, when the cycle time of 4 msec has elapsed and the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 302 executes step S301 again. By doing so, the next normal processing is started.

<Main processing>
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the main process.
In step S401, the MPU 302 executes a start-up process when the power is turned on. In this start-up process, a waiting time is provided for waiting for the control board on the sub side (control board of the voice emission control device 400, etc.) to be in an operable state. Specifically, the MPU 302 waits until a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on.

In step S402, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec, which is a period for prohibiting access to the RAM 313 (hereinafter referred to as a permission prohibition period), has elapsed. The MPU 302 repeatedly executes the process of step S402 until it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed. That is, if it is not determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 302 repeatedly executes the process of step S402, and if it is determined in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 302 executes the processes of step S403 and subsequent steps.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 302 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S402 is executed. For example, when the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S402 is 0.1 msec, the MPU 302 counts the number of times the process of step S402 is executed and determines that 1 sec has elapsed when it reaches 10,000 times. The configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary, and for example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC).

In step S403, the MPU 302 permits access to the RAM 313. In step S404, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the RAM erasing switch (not shown) provided in the power supply / firing control device 243 is turned on. When the MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is turned on (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when it is determined in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on (NO), the MPU 302 determines whether or not the power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 in step S405.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when it is determined in step S405 that the power failure flag is set (YES), the MPU 302 calculates the RAM determination value (checksum) in step S406. In step S407, the MPU 302 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 302 compares the RAM determination value (checksum) calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value (checksum) stored in step S313 (processing at the time of power interruption) of normal processing. If they match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is normal, and if they do not match, it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S407 that the RAM determination value is not normal (NO), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values do not match, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S409. Further, when the MPU 302 is determined in step S407 that the RAM determination value is normal (YES), that is, when it is determined that the checksum values match, the MPU 302 is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 313 in step S408. Clear the power failure flag.

In the present embodiment, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is confirmed by using the checksum, but the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is a method of confirming the consistency of the checksum values. It may be determined by a method different from that. For example, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 313 is confirmed by writing a keyword in a predetermined area of the RAM 313 in the power failure processing and determining whether or not this keyword is normally written in the main processing. You may. Further, the hash value of CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) or MD5 (Hash Function) may be used to confirm the validity of the data stored in RAM 313. The checksum calculation method is very simple. For example, the lower 1 word of the total of each word in the word string may be used as the code value as it is. Therefore, the effectiveness of data confirmation by checksum is lower than that of other error detection codes, but the algorithm is very simple, so it does not burden the MPU 302 even under limited memory space. Can be calculated.

The MPU 302 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on (YES), in step S405 that the power failure flag is not set (NO), or in step S407 that the RAM is determined. If it is determined that the value is not normal (NO), the processing after step S409 is executed.

In step S409, the MPU 302 outputs a voice lamp initialization command to the voice emission control device 400. As a result, the initialization of the RAM data and the abnormality of the data stored and held by the RAM determination value are notified.
In step S410, the MPU 302 outputs a payout initialization command or the like in order to initialize the payout control board or the like that is the control board on the slave side.
In step S411, the MPU 302 clears the work area of the RAM 313 and executes the initialization (initial setting) of the RAM 313 in the step S412.

Therefore, for example, the manager of the amusement park can initialize the data stored in the RAM 313 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM erasing switch at the start of business of the amusement park. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 313 even when the occurrence of the power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 303 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

After executing the process of step S408 or step S412, the MPU 302 executes the open monitoring process for power recovery. Specifically, the MPU 302 executes the detection state grasping process in step S413. In the detection state grasping process, the signal input from the first monitoring device 250, the second monitoring device 290, and the back pack unit open detector 289 is read in the same manner as the signal reading process in step S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). This is done, and the information of this read signal is stored and held in the register of the MPU 302.

In step S414, the comparison process is executed. In the comparison process, the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312. Further, in the comparison process, the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the detection state grasping process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312.

In step S415, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal of the first monitoring device 250 compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value, and the value of the signal of the second monitoring device 290 exceeds the determination reference value. Judge whether or not. As a result, when both are equal to or higher than the determination reference value, the process proceeds to step S417. If either one is smaller than the determination reference value, it means that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened while the power is cut off, so that the process proceeds to step S416.

In step S416, the power recovery notification process is executed. In the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification command is output to the voice emission control device 400. As a result, the notification sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the error display lamp unit 24 is turned on, and the notification display is performed by the symbol display device 91. It should be noted that these notification modes may be different from the notification modes based on the normal notification command. Further, in the voice emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until the notification release operation such as opening / closing the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is performed (when the notification release operation is performed, the main control device 300 (MPU302) starts. The door open notification release command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400 (MPU402)). That is, not only the mode of notification but also the mode of canceling notification is different between the normal time and the time of power recovery. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of notification and the mode of canceling notification may be the same between the normal time and the time of power recovery.

Further, in the power recovery notification process, a power recovery notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal board 213. In this case, the hall computer is targeted for a process of storing identification information such as the date and time when the signal for power recovery notification is input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and a surveillance camera provided in the game hall. A process such as pointing at the pachinko machine 10 is executed.
By executing the above-mentioned notification process for power recovery, if the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 has been opened while the power is cut off, it can be notified to the manager of the game hall or the like. If it is an unauthorized release, it can be dealt with.

It should be noted that the information form of the power cut notification command or the power cut open detection signal depends on whether the front door frame 14 has been opened and the inner frame 13 has been opened in the power recovery notification process. May be different. In this case, the mode of notification can be different in the pachinko machine 10 itself or the hall computer depending on whether the front door frame 14 is opened while the power is cut off or the inner frame 13 is opened while the power is cut off. It is possible to make the manager of the game hall take appropriate measures. Further, the power recovery notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the power recovery notification command and the power recovery notification signal. Further, as processing based on the output of the power recovery notification command, only a part of the notification sound output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is displayed. It may be configured to be executed.

In step S417, the MPU 302 permits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. After that, the MPU 302 shifts to the normal processing described with reference to FIG. 24. As a result, the state before the power is cut off is restored.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game times control process.
In step S501, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 ends the game round control process without executing the processes after step S502. That is, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 302 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the starting ports 84a and 84b is detected.

Here, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode by referring to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313. The same applies to each of the following steps. Further, the MPU 302 sets the open / close execution mode flag at the time of transition to the open / close execution mode, and clears the open / close execution mode flag at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 93 is in the variable display, that is, whether or not the game is in progress. judge. When the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 93 is not in the variable display (NO), the MPU 302 executes the game round start processing of steps S503 to S505. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 93 is in the variable display (YES), the MPU 302 executes the game round progress processing of steps S506 to S509.

In step S503, the MPU 302 recognizes the number of holdings stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit and the number of holdings stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit, and these holding numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not "0" or less (NO), in step S504, the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is used. Executes the data setting process for setting the stored hold information for the digestion of the game times. After that, in step S505, the MPU 302 causes the main display unit 93 and the symbol display device 91 to start the variation display to execute the variation start process for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control process. The data setting process in step S504 will be described later with reference to FIG. 27, and the fluctuation start process in step S505 will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

The MPU 302 determines in step S502 whether or not the main display unit 93 is in the variable display, and if it is determined that the main display unit 93 is in the variable display (YES), the game round progress in steps S506 to S509. Execute the processing.

In step S506, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the display duration set in step S716 of the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28) described later has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 313 is "0" or less. The value of this display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display duration has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 302 executes the variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 302 updates the display of the main display unit 93 during the variation display. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game times control process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S506 that the display duration has elapsed (YES), the MPU 302 executes the variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 302 finally stops the information (finally stopped at the main display unit 93) stored in the RAM 313 in any of the processes of step S710, step S713, and step S715 of the variation start process (see FIG. 28) described later. Specify the information related to the symbol to be displayed). Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 302 executes the display control of the main display unit 93 so that the symbol corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 93 during the variable display.

Here, the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, the manager of the game field can confirm the game result by visually observing the main display unit 93 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the amusement park can easily confirm whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is performing a fraudulent act similar to the case where the lottery for the occurrence of a big hit is won. Can be done.

The display area of the main display unit 93 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, and the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 is the symbol display column Z1 to be stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. Compared to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the jackpot has been won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 instead of the main display unit 93. The degree of attention to the screen G increases.

In step S509, the MPU 302 sets a variable end command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation end command set in step S509 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the normal process. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game times control process. The voice emission control device 400 executes a process for ending the effect of the game round based on the variable end command transmitted from the MPU 302. Here, the voice emission control device 400 may be configured to independently end the effect of the game round without requiring the reception of the variable end command.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process in step S504 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the data setting process.
In step S601, the MPU 302 has a second start hold storage number RbN of "0" or less in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit set in step S204 of the winning process for the start port (see FIG. 23) described above. It is determined whether or not it is. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is "0" or less (YES), the data for the first result display unit (for the first start port 84a) of steps S602 to S606. When the setting process is executed and it is determined in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less (NO), it is for the second result display unit of steps S607 to S611 (for the second start port 84b). Executes the data setting process of.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described. In step S602, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit, and the first start hold stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. The value of the storage number RaN is updated. In step S603, the MPU 302 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S604, the MPU 302 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra2. Shift to area Ra3. That is, in steps S603 and S604, the shift processing of the data stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is executed by the FIFO (First In, First Out) method.

In step S605, the MPU 302 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 313. This second result display unit flag is a flag for specifying which of the first result display unit 93a and the second result display unit 93b, which of the main display unit 93, has started the variable display at the time of digesting the game times. Is. In this step S605, since the MPU 302 has cleared the second result display unit flag, it changes to the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S606, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a by voice emission control. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize.

The voice emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 95a based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 reduces the number of game balls held in the first start port 84a, that is, the number of first start hold storages stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit. As RaN decreases, the number of lighting of the first holding lamp unit 95a is reduced.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described. In step S607, the MPU 302 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and the second start hold stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. The value of the storage number RbN is updated. In step S608, the MPU 302 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb2 of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit to the execution area AE.

In step S609, the MPU 302 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the hold area Rb for the second result display unit. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the reserved information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 302 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and shifts the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3. That is, in steps S608 and S609, the shift processing of the data stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb is executed by the FIFO (First In First Out, FIFO) method.

In step S610, the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 313. In this step S610, since the MPU 302 sets the second result display unit flag, it changes to the second result display unit 93b based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 84b at the time of digesting the game times. Indicates that the display should be started.

In step S611, the MPU 302 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the reserved information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the voice emission control device 400, and ends the data setting process. This shift command indicates that the shift of the hold information is executed for the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b. It contains information for the device 400 to recognize. The voice emission control device 400 changes the lighting state of the second hold lamp unit 95b based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 reduces the number of reserved game balls winning in the second starting port 84b, that is, the second starting reserved storage number RbN stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display unit. As the number of lamps is reduced, the number of lighting of the second holding lamp unit 95b is reduced.

As described above, in the data setting process in FIG. 27, the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit is set for the digestion of the game times for the first result display unit (for the first start port 84a). ) Data setting processing (S602 to S606) and the second result display unit (for the second start port 84b) that sets the hold information stored in the second result display unit reservation area Rb for digestion of game times. It has the data setting processing (S607 to S611) of. When the MPU 302 determines in step S601 that the second start hold storage number RbN is not "0" or less, the MPU 302 sets the data for the second result display unit without executing the data setting process for the first result display unit. Execute the process. When the MPU 302 determines that there is hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit based on the prize of the game ball to the second start port 84b, the MPU 302 wins the game ball to the first start port 84a. Regardless of whether or not there is hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit based on, the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit is preferentially used for digesting the game. Set to.

<Variation disclosure processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S505 of FIG. 26 will be described in detail. FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start process.
In step S701, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. When the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S702, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 20A) is displayed from the winning / failing table storage area of the ROM 312. read out. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S701 that the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode (YES), in step S703, the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 20B) is used as the winning / failing table of ROM 312. Read from the storage area.

After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 302 executes the pass / fail determination process in step S704. Specifically, the MPU 302 has the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE and the hit / miss table for the low probability mode read in step S702 or the hit / miss table for the high probability mode read in step S703. The result of the winning / failing lottery (winning / failing result) is determined by comparison with. The winning / failing result is either "big hit winning", "special losing result", or "normal losing result", and the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" regardless of whether the mode is low probability mode or high probability mode. , "Special off result", and "Normal off result".

In step S705, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is "big hit winning". When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the process after step S706 is executed, and when it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not "big hit winning" (YES). NO), the processing after step S712 is executed.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S706 whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313.

Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, it is shown that the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), in step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 21 (a)) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, it is shown that the second result display unit 93b based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b starts the variable display. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), in step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 21B) is ROM 312. Read from the distribution table storage area of.

After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 302 executes the distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 302 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read out in step S707 or step S708 to obtain the result of the distribution lottery ( Sorting result) is judged.

In step S710, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determined information. That is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 is information related to a symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by comparing the distribution result determined in step S709 with the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 312. To determine. The stop result table for the jackpot result defines the mode of the symbol to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 differently for each distribution result.

In step S711, the MPU 302 sets a flag in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result determined in step S709. Specifically, when the MPU 302 specifies that the distribution result is a "low probability result", the low probability result flag is set, and when it is specified that the distribution result is an "unspecified small round high probability result", When the unspecified small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "explicit small round high probability result", the explicit small round high probability result flag is set and it is specified that it is the "most advantageous result". If so, set the most favorable result flag. After that, the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S716. In the processing of each of the following steps, the MPU 302 determines the distribution result with reference to the presence / absence of the flag set in the RAM 313.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not a “big hit winning” (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S712 whether or not the winning / failing result determined in step S704 is a “special missed result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S712 that the pass / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the process after step S713 is executed, and in step S712 it is determined that the pass / fail result is not a "special miss result". If (NO), the processing after step S715 is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 302 executes a stop result setting process for the special deviation result. In the stop result setting process for the special deviation result, the MPU 302 determines and determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93. The information, that is, the information related to the symbol to be stopped and displayed is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the special deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. The aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the special deviation result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result. In step S714, the MPU 302 sets the special off flag in the RAM 313. In each of the following processes, the MPU 302 refers to the presence / absence of the special deviation flag set in the RAM 313 and determines whether or not the hit / fail result is the “special deviation result”.

In step S715, the MPU 302 normally executes a stop result setting process for the off-result. In this stop result setting process for the normal deviation result, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 93a or the second result display unit 93b of the main display unit 93, and the determination is made. The generated information is stored in the RAM 313. Here, the MPU 302 determines the information related to the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 93 by referring to the stop result table for the normal deviation result stored in advance in the ROM 312. It should be noted that the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the normal deviation result is different from the aspect of the symbol set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special deviation result.

After executing any of the processes of step S711, step S714, and step S715, the MPU 302 executes a display duration (display continuation period) setting process in step S716. The process of setting the display duration (display duration) will be described in detail later.

In step S717, the MPU 302 sets a variable command and a type command. The MPU 302 transmits the variation command and the type command set in step S717 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24) to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 executes a predetermined process based on the variable command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302, and the process will be described in detail later.

The variable command includes information related to the display duration, but does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs. In addition, the type command includes information related to the result of success or failure and information related to the result of distribution. More specifically, the type command includes each information related to the "big hit winning", the "special losing result", and the "normal losing result" as the information related to the winning / failing result. In addition, in the type command, as information related to the distribution result, each information related to "low probability result", "unspecified small round high probability result", "explicit small round high probability result", and "most advantageous result". It is included. In the following description, the result of success or failure and the result of distribution are collectively referred to as a game result. That is, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, and causes the main display unit 93 to start variable display based on the determination result. Here, when the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, variable display is started in the first result display unit 93a based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 84a at the time of digesting the game times. It shows that it is made to do.

Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 causes the first result display unit 93a to start the variable display in step S718. Further, when the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, the second result display unit 93b starts the variable display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 84b at the time of digesting the game times. It is shown that. Therefore, when the MPU 302 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 313, the MPU 302 causes the second result display unit 93b to start variable display in step S718.

<Display duration setting process>
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the display duration setting process.
In step S801, the MPU 302 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer of the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 313. Further, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 91. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines in step S802 whether the distribution result determined in step S709 is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result".

In step S802, when the distribution result is a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" (YES), the pass / fail result determined in step S704 of FIG. 28 in step S803 is a "normal deviation result". Is determined. When the MPU 302 determines in step S803 that the result of success or failure is a "normally wrong result" (YES), in step S804, the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 312 and the reach random number stored in the reserved ball storage area. The reach generation lottery is executed by comparing with the value of the counter C3.

In step S805, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the reach display is generated in the reach generation lottery in step S804. When the MPU 302 determines in step S805 that the reach display will occur (YES), the MPU 302 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 in the step S806. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S802 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" or a "most advantageous result" (NO), and in step S803, it determines that the pass / fail result is not a "normal deviation result". (NO), or when it is determined in step S805 that the reach display does not occur (NO), the reach non-generation display duration table stored in the ROM 312 is referred to in step S807.

In step S808, the MPU 302 determines the display duration after executing the process of step S806 or step S807. Specifically, the MPU 302 is a variation type counter CS acquired from the movement type counter buffer based on the reach generation display duration table referred to in step S806 or the reach non-generation display duration table referred to in step S807. Determines the display duration corresponding to the value of. Further, the MPU 302 sets the display duration determined in step S807 to the display duration counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

In the present embodiment, as described with reference to steps S804 to S808 of FIG. 29, the MPU 302 has a reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 312 and a reach stored in the hold ball storage area. A lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by comparing with the value of the random number counter C3, and the lottery for whether or not to generate the reach display is executed by the voice emission control device 400. It may be configured in.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation is set so that the display duration becomes shorter as the number of reserved items increases. That is, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the first start port 84a is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the first start port 84a increases. Further, the display duration when digesting the hold information related to the second start port 84b is set so as to become shorter as the number of hold items related to the second start port 84b increases. If a prize is won in the first starting port 84a or the second starting port 84b in excess of the maximum number of reserved balls (4 pieces), the prize balls can be paid out, but the big hit lottery cannot be received. However, as in the present embodiment, as the number of holdings increases, the display duration is shortened and the game times are digested faster, so that the maximum value of the number of holdings is exceeded and a prize is won (the prize ball is paid out). However, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which a lottery for a big hit cannot be received), and it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the display duration table for non-reach occurrence, the display duration is set shorter when the support mode is the high frequency support mode and as compared with the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. That is, when the number of holdings is the same, the display duration of the high frequency support mode is set shorter than the display duration of the low frequency support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation are set so that the display durations are different from each other.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display duration determined by referring to the reach generation display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-generation display duration table are defined. They are different from each other. Therefore, even if the information on whether or not the reach display occurs is not included in the variable command, the reach display is performed by the voice emission control device 400, which is the control device on the sub side, based on the information related to the display duration. Can be determined. In this sense, it can be said that the variable command indirectly includes information on whether or not a reach display occurs. The variable command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

In the present embodiment, the display duration table for non-reach generation has a shorter display duration as the number of holds increases, but the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases. It may be set in the opposite relationship to the above, and may be configured so that the display duration does not change (change) depending on the number of holdings and the support mode. Further, the display duration table for reach generation and the display duration table for non-reach generation may be the same. In this case, regardless of whether reach occurs or not, the same display duration table is referred to to determine the display duration corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the motion type counter buffer, and various counters of the RAM 313 are determined. It may be set in the display duration counter provided in the area. Further, the display duration table may be set individually for each of the pass / fail result and the distribution result.

<Game state transition process>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In step S901, the MPU 302 determines whether or not it is in the open / close execution mode. When it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 302 is not in the open / close execution mode (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes of steps S902 to S910. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes of steps S911 to S914.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S902 whether or not the variation display of the main display unit 93 is completed. When it is determined in step S902 that the variation display of the main display unit 93 has not been completed (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S902 that the variable display of the main display unit 93 is completed (YES), in step S903, whether or not the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. judge. Specifically, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the winning / failing result is a "big hit winning" or a "special losing result".

When the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result does not correspond to the shift to the open / close execution mode (NO), that is, when the hit / fail result is determined to be a "normally out of order result", the game state transition process is performed. finish. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (YES), the hit / fail result is set in the RAM 313 in the open / close execution mode, and then in step S904. Is a "special deviation result" or not.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 sets "2" in the open / close counter SOC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 in step S905. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the large winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83 is opened / closed by the MPU 302 when shifting to the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S904 that the winning / failing result is not a "special missed result" (NO), that is, when the winning / failing result is determined to be a "big hit winning", the distribution result is small in step S906. It is determined whether or not the round is a high-accuracy result (“unspecified low-round high-accuracy result” or “explicit low-round high-accuracy result”).

When the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), in step S907, "2" is set in the round counter RC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S906 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), that is, when the distribution result is determined to be a "low accuracy result" or a "most advantageous result". In step S908, "15" is set in the round counter RC. This round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 302 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of open / close execution modes in which the end conditions are different from each other. Specifically, as the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 has a round number regulation mode that shifts when the winning / failing result is "big hit winning" and an opening / closing number that shifts when the winning / failing result is "special loss result". It has a specified mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC. The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on condition that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a of the total number of predetermined times is executed, or the predetermined number of game balls wins the large winning opening 83a. Here, the total number of times of opening and closing of the large winning opening 83a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on the condition that the number of round games is executed.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the large winning opening 83a once for each round game. Further, one round game is continued until one of the following two conditions (1) and (2) is satisfied. That is, in the present embodiment, after setting the opening / closing door 83b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 satisfies the opening / closing door 83b by satisfying one of the following two conditions (1) and (2). Is set to the closed state again.
(1) The predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed. (2) The total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a reaches the predetermined upper limit.

After executing any of the processes of step S905, step S907, or step S908, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313 as a waiting time (waiting period) for opening in step S909. Set "1000". The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the opening is 2 sec. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the gaming state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

In this way, when the MPU 302 determines in step S903 that the hit / fail result corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets the waiting time for the opening in the timer counter T regardless of the type of the game result. .. In other words, the waiting time for the opening is the same regardless of the type of game result. The waiting time for the opening is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the opening differs greatly between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S910, the MPU 302 sets the opening command. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Here, the opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the open / close execution mode, and the MPU 302 was set in step S910 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 24). The opening command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the transition to the open / close execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S901 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S911. The process of opening and closing the large winning opening in step S911 will be described in detail later.

In step S912, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S911. judge.

When it is determined in step S912 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S912 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are "0" or less (YES), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S913. It is determined whether or not it is as follows.

When it is determined in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process. If the MPU 302 determines in step S913 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 313 in step S914, and then opens / closes. Executes the transition process at the end of the mode. After that, the MPU 302 ends the game state transition process.

Next, the large winning opening opening / closing process of step S911 in FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening / closing process.
In step S1001, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the large winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1002. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1006.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S1002. It is determined whether or not it is as follows. When it is determined in step S1002 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1002 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S1003. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1003 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S1004. The process of opening the large winning opening will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S1005, the MPU 302 sets an open command. Further, the MPU 302 transmits the release command set in step S1005 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the open / close door 83b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1001 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S1006, that is, opening the large winning opening. It is determined in step S1103 or step S1106 of the process (see FIG. 32) whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 whether or not a prize has occurred in the large winning opening 83a. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the large winning opening 83a.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1007 that no prize has been awarded to the large prize opening 83a (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when it is determined in step S1007 that a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S1008.

In step S1009, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When it is determined in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1009 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the closing execution process in step S1010. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the opening / closing door 83b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c.

In step S1011 the MPU 302 sets a close command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S1011 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1012, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1018, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the pass / fail result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1013. In step S1013, the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. Further, in step S1014, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is set to "500" in step S1015. After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1015 is an open standby until the open / close door 83b is set to the open state, the open / close door 83b is set to the closed state again, and then the open / close door 83b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the present embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1014 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1016. In step S1016, the MPU 302 sets the timer counter T to "2000" as the waiting time (waiting period) for the ending. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the waiting time for the ending is 4 sec. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily determined according to the combination of the game state and the winning symbol (special symbol).

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S1017, the MPU 302 sets the ending command. The MPU 302 transmits the ending command set in step S1017 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1006 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the process after step S1010 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1012 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S1018.

In step S1019, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 executes the process after step S1015 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1019 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the above-mentioned processing after S1016.

Next, the large winning opening opening process in step S1004 of FIG. 31 will be described in detail.
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the large winning opening opening process.
In step S1101, the MPU 302 sets "8" in the winning counter PC provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S1102, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the hit / fail result is a "special miss result" (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1102 that the hit / fail result is not a "special deviation result" (NO), the distribution result is a small round high probability result ("unspecified small round high probability result" or in step S1104. It is determined whether or not the result is "explicit small round high accuracy result").

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is a small round high accuracy result (YES), the timer counter T is set to "85" in step S1103 described above. As described above, the MPU 302 updates the timer counter T by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1104 that the distribution result is not a small round high accuracy result (NO), the timer counter T is set to "15000" in step S1105. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 sec.

After executing the process of step S1103 or step S1105, the MPU 302 executes the opening execution process of the large winning opening 83a in step S1106. In this open execution process, the MPU 302 sets the open / close door 83b to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c. After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening process.

The value set in the winning counter PC in step S1101 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a. Further, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1103 or step S1105 defines the upper limit duration from setting the open / close door 83b to the open state to setting it to the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 302 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting the timer counter T to "85" or "15000". Specifically, the MPU 302 sets a long-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short-time mode in which the upper limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode.

In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 110 to launch the game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 110 at a cycle of 0.6 sec. Further, the MPU 302 sets the upper limit of the total number of winning balls to the large winning opening 83a to 8 by setting "8" in the winning counter PC. Therefore, the upper limit duration (30 sec) of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning balls in the large winning opening 83a and the firing cycle of the game balls, and thus is the upper limit of eight. It is easy to make the game ball of No. 1 win a prize in the large winning opening 83a. On the other hand, since the upper limit duration (0.17 sec) of the short-time mode is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball, it is difficult to make the game ball win the big winning opening 83a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to make about one game ball win in the large winning opening 83a.

Next, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode in step S914 of FIG. 30 will be described in detail.
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.
In step S1201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (YES), the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 in step S1202. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode.

In step S1203, the MPU 302 clears the number-of-times limit flag stored in the RAM 313.
Here, the high-frequency support mode is continued until the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is not set, at least until a "big hit win" is obtained in the win / fail lottery.

In step S1204, the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

At the end of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the MPU 302 sets a flag (low probability result flag, unspecified small round high probability result flag, explicit small round height) set in the RAM 313 according to the distribution result. Clear the probability result flag and the most advantageous result flag) and the special off flag. Further, in step S701 of the above-mentioned fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 28), the MPU 302 determines whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 313, thereby determining whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Is determined.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1201 that the distribution result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" (NO), the distribution result is "unspecified small round high" in step S1205. It is determined whether or not the result is "certain result". When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is an "unspecified low round high accuracy result" (YES), the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313. ..

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S1203 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1206 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 313 (NO), the MPU 302 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 313 in the step S1207. The MPU 302 maintains the high probability mode flag if it is already set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the winning / failing lottery mode as the high probability mode. This high-probability mode is continued until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1205 that the distribution result is not an "unspecified small round high accuracy result" (NO), the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 whether or not the distribution result is a "low accuracy result". ..

When the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is not a "low probability result" (NO), that is, when it is determined that the hit / fail result is a "special deviation result", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is performed. To finish.
Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S1208 that the distribution result is a "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 302 clears the high probability mode flag in step S1209. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the winning / failing lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least the winning / losing lottery becomes a "big win" and the distribution result is other than the "low probability result".

In step S1210, the MPU 302 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the high frequency support flag if it is already set in the RAM 313. As a result, the MPU 302 sets or maintains the support mode as the high frequency support mode. In step S1211, the MPU 302 sets "100" to the value of the game count counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313. In step S1212, the MPU 302 sets the number-of-times limit flag to the RAM 313. The MPU 302 maintains the number-of-times limit flag if it has already been set in the RAM 313. After that, the MPU 302 ends the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 313 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 game times, which is the end reference number set in the game number-of-game counter, are set. Continue until digested. The MPU 302 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times limit flag when 100 game rounds have been completed. As a result, the MPU 302 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode. The MPU 302 executes these processes as the electric service support process in step S306 of the above-mentioned normal process (see FIG. 24), but detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" or the "explicit small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the gaming state is the current gaming state. Regardless of the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), the mode shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the current support mode is the high frequency support mode, if the winning / fail lottery becomes a "big hit win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state. After the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number specified mode), shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the winning / fail lottery results in a "big win" and the distribution result becomes an "unspecified small round high probability result" in the distribution lottery. , The gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode). The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode continue until at least a "big win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery.

In addition, when the winning / fail lottery results in a "big hit" and the distribution result becomes a "low probability result" in the distribution lottery, the game state is the open / close execution mode (that is, the number of rounds) regardless of the current game state. After the end of the specified mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode continues until at least a "big hit" is won in the winning / losing lottery, and the high-frequency support mode is a low-frequency support when 100 game times are completed without becoming a "big hit winning" in the winning / losing lottery. Move to mode.

In addition, if the winning / failing lottery does not result in a "big hit winning", that is, if the winning / failing result becomes a "special loss result" or a "normal loss result" in the win / loss lottery, the gaming state does not shift.

Next, the front door frame opening monitoring process in step S102 of FIG. 22 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the front door frame opening monitoring process.

In the front door frame opening monitoring process, first, the comparison process is executed in step S1301. In the comparison process, the detection state information (light receiving signal) stored in the register of the MPU 302 in the signal read process is compared with the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312. In the following step S1302, it is determined whether or not the value of the signal compared in the comparison process exceeds the determination reference value.

When the value of the signal is smaller than the determination reference value in step S1302 (NO), it means that the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13. When the signal value does not meet the determination reference value in this way, in order to notify that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source. In step S1303, the normal time notification process is executed.

In the normal time notification process, a normal time notification command is set. This set normal notification command is output to the voice emission control device 400 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 23). In the voice emission control device 400, the notification sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the error display lamp unit 24 is turned on, and the notification display is further performed by the symbol display device 91. In the voice emission control device 400, various notifications are continued until the notification release operation such as opening / closing the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is performed (when the notification release operation is performed, the door open notification release command is transmitted to the MPU 402. ). In the voice emission control device 400, the various notifications may be stopped after the various notifications are continued for a predetermined notification time (notification period). As the notification time, for example, 10 sec or the like can be considered.

Further, in the normal time notification process, a normal time notification signal is output to the hall computer provided in the game hall via the external terminal board 213. In this case, the hall computer stores identification information such as the date and time when the normal time notification signal is input from the pachinko machine 10 and the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 as a history, and the pachinko targeting the surveillance camera provided in the game hall. A process such as pointing to the machine 10 is executed.

In a situation where power is supplied from an external power source, if the above-mentioned normal time notification process is executed at the timing when the front door frame 14 is opened, not at the timing when the front door frame 14 is closed. , It is possible to make the manager of the game hall and the like deal with the illegal opening of the front door frame 14.

The normal time notification process is not limited to the above, and may be configured to output only one of the normal time notification command and the normal time notification signal. Further, as processing based on the output of the normal notification command, only a part of the output of the notification sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the lighting of the error display lamp unit 24, or the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is executed. It may be configured to be used. After executing the normal notification process in step S1303, the front door frame opening monitoring process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the signal value is equal to or higher than the determination reference value in step S1302 (YES), in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the normal time notification command has already been set.
If the normal notification command is already set in step S1304 (YES), the notification release process is executed in step S1305.
When the value of the signal in step S1302 is equal to or greater than the determination reference value, it means that the front door frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 13. Further, when the normal time notification command is already set in step S1304, it means that notification has been performed. In this way, when the signal value is equal to or higher than the judgment reference value and the normal time notification command is already set, the front door frame 14 becomes the inner frame 13 in a situation where power is being supplied from an external power source. On the other hand, since it means that the closing operation (notification release operation) has been performed, the notification release process is executed in step S1305.

In step S1306, the set normal time notification command is canceled, in other words, the flag of the normal time notification command is cleared (value is 0).
In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22), after the front door frame opening monitoring process is executed in step S102, the second monitoring device 290 in a situation where power is supplied from an external power source in step S103. As the monitoring process of the inner frame 13 via the above, the inner frame opening monitoring process and the opening detection of the back pack unit 15 via the back pack unit opening detector 289 are executed.

In the inner frame opening monitoring process, when the detection status information (light receiving signal) of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is smaller than the determination reference value stored in the ROM 312, the above-mentioned normal time notification The processing is executed and the detection status information is updated. If the detection status information (light receiving signal) of the second monitoring device 290 grasped by the signal reading process is equal to or higher than the judgment reference value stored in the ROM 312, the normal time notification command is already set. If the normal notification command is already set, the notification cancellation process is performed. Since this specific processing configuration is the same as the front door frame opening monitoring processing, duplicate description will be omitted. Further, in the open detection of the back pack unit 15, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open based on the output signal (High or Low) from the back pack unit open detector 289.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 400 and display control device 500>
FIG. 35 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device and the display control device. As shown in FIG. 35, the voice emission control device 400 includes a voice emission control board 401, an MPU 402 mounted on the voice emission control board 401, and a ROM 412 and a RAM 413 constituting the MPU 402. Here, the MPU 402 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit (RTC), a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the ROM 412 and the RAM 413.

The ROM 412 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. The ROM 412 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and stores various control programs and fixed value data used for executing processing according to the programs in each area. ing. The MPU 402 controls the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 300 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 412. Since the ROM 412 is chipped with the CPU and connected by an internal bus, it is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity, and specifically, its data capacity is 2 Mbytes.

The RAM 413 is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared with the data capacity of, the time required for reading is faster than that of ROM412. The RAM 413 has a plurality of areas (areas) logically separated by logical addresses, and has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas, for example. The RAM 413 temporarily stores various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 412 is executed. It is not essential that the ROM 412 and the RAM 413 are integrated into a single chip with respect to the MPU 402, and each may be individually chipped.

The voice emission control board 401 includes an input port (not shown) and an output port (not shown). The input port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the main control device 300. Further, the input port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the operation button 35. The output port of the voice emission control board 401 is connected to the display lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error display lamp unit 24, the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96, the speaker units 26A to 26C, the display control device 500, and the like. There is. The MPU 402 drives and controls the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, the error indicator lamp units 24, the first to third hold lamp units 95a to 96, the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the like based on the commands transmitted from the main control device 300. To execute. Further, the MPU 402 analyzes the command transmitted from the main control device 300 to determine the content of the effect in a predetermined period, and transmits the command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500. For this command transmission, a signal path provided to connect the MPU 402 and the MPU 502 is used. The voice emission control device 400 is electrically connected to the display control device 500 via a connector unit (connection unit) such as a harness provided with connectors at both ends of the signal line.

When the MPU 402 determines the content of the effect in the predetermined period, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of not only the display control device 500 but also the display lamp devices 23A and 23B. In this case, although it is described in FIG. 35 that the voice emission control board 401 and the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are directly connected, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound emission control board 401 is displayed. A relay board may be interposed between the lamp devices 23A and 23B.

The MPU 402 executes drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C when the content of the effect in the predetermined period is determined. The sound output LSI 403 and the common ROM 404 are used for drive control of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The common ROM 404 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) such as a NOR type flash memory or a NAND type flash memory that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. Since the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402 but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, it is easier to increase the data capacity than the ROM 412. Specifically, the data capacity is 1 Gbyte. However, this data capacity is arbitrary and may be 500 Mbytes or 4 Gbytes.

The sound output LSI 403 includes an I / F 403a, a register 403b, a sound data processing unit 403c, a DAC 403d, and a data transfer unit 403e. The sound output LSI 403 executes control for outputting sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the data transmitted from the MPU 402.

The I / F 403a is an interface for the sound output LSI 403 to communicate with the MPU 402 via a bus B1 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication. The bus B1 connected to the I / F 403a is composed of eight signal paths, and data is transmitted / received between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 via each signal path.

The register 403b has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output LSI 403, and uses a memory that requires external power supply for storage retention for both reading and writing. It is configured to do. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

The register 403b has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 10 kilobytes.

The sound data processing unit 403c converts the sequence data and parameter data transmitted from the MPU 402 and stored in the register 403b so that they can be used for sound output, and from the contents of the conversion result and the common ROM 404. It has a function to create digital music sound data by using the read sound data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is.

Further, the sound data processing unit 403c has a function of a plurality of sounding channels so as to be able to output a plurality of different sounds at the same time, and the digital musical sound data created for each sounding channel is synthesized to obtain digitally synthesized musical sound data. Has the function of creating. It should be noted that the plurality of sounding channels have the functions of 16 channels, but the number of channels is arbitrary. Further, by using the virtual track, a number of tracks (for example, 64 tracks) larger than the actual number of sounding channels can be used, but the virtual track may not be used.

The DAC403d is a digital / analog converter and includes an amplifier circuit for analog signals. The DAC 403d has a function of amplifying an analog audio signal obtained by converting digital music data or digital synthetic music data created by the sound data processing unit 403c into an analog signal and then outputting the analog audio signal to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The data transfer unit 403e is connected to the common ROM 404 via a bus B2 provided as a signal path group for bidirectional communication, and has a function of transferring the data read from the common ROM 404 to the register 403b. ing. The bus B2 provided between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is composed of 16 signal paths, and the number of the signal paths is larger than that of the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the I / F 403a. It is a number. The data communication speed between the data transfer unit 403e and the common ROM 404 is faster than the data communication speed between the MPU 402 and the I / F 403a. The data transfer unit 403e reads the sound data necessary for sound output from the common ROM 404 based on the data converted from the sequence data and the parameter data in the sound data processing unit 403c, and stores it in the register 403b.

Here, the data transfer unit 403e not only has a function of transferring the sound data required by the sound data processing unit 403c to the register 403b, but also reads the data required by the MPU 402 from the common ROM 404 and stores it in the register 403b. It has a function of transferring the data stored in the register 403b to the MPU 402. The configuration related to data transfer will be described below.

<Data structure of ROM412 and common ROM404>
First, the data configurations of the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. 36 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the ROM 412, and FIG. 36 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data structure of the common ROM 404.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the ROM 412 has a program and processing data (1), a program and processing data (2), for executing processing for effect control and abnormality notification by the MPU 402. ..., The program and the processing data (P) are stored in advance. These programs and processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output LSI 403. All the programs and processing data necessary for executing the processing for effect control in the MPU 402 are stored in the ROM 412. The program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process are used in the program and processing data used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and in the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. It is different from the program and processing data. Therefore, the sound data described later is reproduced in different modes between the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process.

The ROM 412 contains not only the program and processing data (1), the program and processing data (2), ..., The program and processing data (P), but also the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24. The light emission data (1), the light emission data (2), ..., And the light emission data (Q) used for controlling the light emission of the above are stored in advance. In each of these light emission data, information on the type, lighting period, and lighting order of the light emitting unit to be lit among the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is set in the predetermined effect period, and the information of these light emission patterns is set. The content is different depending on the type of each emission data. Each of the light emission data stored in the ROM 412 has a different light emission control period, and the content of the light emission pattern is different.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36B, the common ROM 404 has sound data (1), sound data (2), ... , Sound data (S) is stored in advance. Each of these sound data includes waveform data obtained by sampling a melody or sound actually produced by an instrument corresponding to various tones, and a melody with lyrics is pronounced by an instrument corresponding to various tones. In addition to the melody that has been made, the waveform data obtained by sampling the sound is included. All the sound data is stored in the common ROM 404. The sound data stored in the common ROM 404 includes the music (BGM) used in the effects A to D of FIG. 41, which will be described later, and the sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the voice, as well as the figure. Abnormal notification used in the power recovery notification processing of 25 and the normal notification processing of FIG. 34 (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, even during normal time. For example, sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to "the door is open!", "The door is closed!" When returning from the door opening, etc., first mode M1 to FIG. 43 Sound data (music data and voice data) corresponding to the music and voice used in the production of the fifth mode M5, and sound data corresponding to the music and voice used in the production MA to MC of the fourth mode of FIG. 49 (music data and voice data). Music data and voice data) etc. are included.

The sound data is digital signal data obtained by converting an analog signal into a pulse train at a predetermined sampling frequency and a predetermined number of quantization signals by pulse code modulation (PCM). Specifically, the sampling frequency is 44.1 kHz and the number of quantization signals is 16 bits. Therefore, the waveform data of the sound composed of the analog signal for 1 sec has a data amount of 1 × 44.1 k × 16 bits. Incidentally, the sampling period T1 in this case is 22.7 μsec.

The sound data is set so as to be readable from the common ROM 404 for each pulse code-modulated data for one pulse, that is, data for one sample. That is, the address is set for each sample of data, and the data transfer unit 403e of the sound output LSI 403 can transfer data from the common ROM 404 in units of data for one sample.

The sampling frequency is not limited to 44.1 kHz as long as good sampling can be achieved, and may be, for example, 32 kHz, 48 kHz, or 96 kHz. Further, the number of quantization signals is not limited to 16 bits, and may be any number of bits other than 16 bits as long as good quantization can be realized.

Further, in the common ROM 404, not only sound data (1), sound data (2), ... sound data (S), but also light emission data (Q + 1), light emission data (Q + 2), ..., Light emission data (R) is stored in advance. Here, the light emitting data stored in the common ROM 404 includes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. It contains luminescence data used to control the luminescence of. Each of these light emission data has a different period of target light emission control and a different light emission pattern.

Here, the light emission patterns of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are different in the power recovery notification process (step S416) of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process (step S1303) of FIG. 34. Specifically, in the power recovery notification process, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 emit light, whereas in the normal time notification process, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 are emitted. The light emission data is specified so that the light does not emit light. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the normal time notification process, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off so as not to emit light. The light emission data is specified as follows.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light in the open state, the same light emission data is used in the power recovery notification process of FIG. 25 and the normal time notification process of FIG. 34. In the normal notification process, a light bulb in which light emitting elements such as LEDs (light emitting diodes), filaments, and discharge elements of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are enclosed in a glass shell so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light. It may be configured to stop the supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body such as. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced. Of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is configured so as not to emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened. You may. In this case as well, the light emission data of the normal notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the light emission data of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 may be specified. The supply of light-emitting power to a light-emitting body such as a light bulb in which a light-emitting element such as an LED (light-emitting diode), a filament, or a discharge element of an indicator lamp device on the open side is enclosed in a glass bulb may be stopped.

As described above, the light emission data used in the MPU 402 is stored not only in the ROM 412 directly connected to the MPU 402 via the bus, but also in the common ROM 404 connected to the sound output LSI 403. In other words, the light emission data is distributed and stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

By storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404 in this way, it is possible to increase the data capacity of the light emission data without increasing the storage capacity of the ROM 412. In particular, as described above, the ROM 412 is relatively difficult to increase its data capacity due to being connected via the internal bus in the MPU 402, and attempts to increase the data capacity are attempted. Then, it becomes necessary to expand the internal bus width, and it is not easy to deal with it. On the other hand, as described above, the common ROM 404 is not directly connected to the MPU 402, but is externally attached to the sound output LSI 403, thereby increasing its data capacity. That is relatively easy. Then, by storing the light emission data in the common ROM 404, it is possible to cope well with the increase in the data capacity of the light emission data.

Further, basically, when setting data in the ROM, about several% (for example, about 2%) of the total data capacity is blank (unused area). In this case, for example, assuming that the data capacity of the common ROM 404 is 1 Gbyte, the blank is 20 Mbytes. This data capacity is larger than the data capacity of the ROM 412, which is 2 Mbytes. According to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

Furthermore, since the sound data corresponds to the melody and voice for a predetermined period, the data capacity for performing a series of outputs is relatively large. Then, it becomes difficult to accommodate the data capacity of the sound data, and from this point as well, a blank is likely to occur in the common ROM 404. Then, according to this configuration, it is possible to distribute and store the light emission data by using such a blank.

The light emission data stored in the common ROM 404 is used in the MPU 402, and when it becomes necessary to use it in the MPU 402, it is commonly used in the sound output LSI 403 in response to a transfer instruction from the MPU 402. The light emission data from the ROM 404 is read out, and the read light emission data is transferred to the MPU 402. Then, in this transfer, the bus B1 connecting the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403 is used. That is, the light emission data distributed and stored in the common ROM 404 is transferred to the MPU 402 by using the signal path for data transfer from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403 or the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402. As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which a ROM different from the ROM 412 is externally attached to the MPU 402 and the surplus light emission data is stored in the ROM, the surplus light emission data is obtained without increasing the number of signal paths. Can be memorized.

Of the program and processing data used in the MPU 402 and the light emission data, all of the program and processing data are stored in the ROM 412, and a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404. By doing so, it becomes possible to satisfactorily distribute the data. That is, if the program and processing data are distributed to the common ROM 404, the program and processing data for transferring the program and processing data to the RAM 413 of the MPU 402 are separately required, which complicates the program design. It will be something like that. On the other hand, the light emission data is a method in which the address where the light emission data is originally stored is grasped, the light emission data is read out and transferred based on the address, and the light emission data is expanded so that it can be used. Therefore, even if the light emission data is distributed, the program design is unlikely to be complicated.

Further, when the effect system command is transmitted from the main control device 300, the MPU 402 first uses a program to execute a predetermined process corresponding to the command, and uses the light emission data in the execution process of the predetermined process. Then, the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are controlled. That is, the program needs to be read suddenly in response to the reception of a command from the main control device 300, and the timing of reading is highly arbitrary, whereas the light emission data is used in the execution process of a predetermined process. The timing of reading is low. Further, since the light emission data is used on the premise of executing a predetermined process using the program, the priority of reading is higher in the program, and if the read of the program is delayed, the process waits. Under such circumstances, the program is stored in the ROM 412, and at least a part of the light emission data is stored in the common ROM 404, so that the program can be independently read by the MPU 402 regardless of the state of the sound output LSI 403. It is possible to satisfactorily increase the amount of data for luminescence data, which tends to have a larger amount of data than the program.

Furthermore, instead of storing all of the light emission data in the common ROM 404, a part of the light emission data is stored in the ROM 412 and the rest is stored in the common ROM 404. Therefore, the data capacity of the common ROM 404 can be increased. It is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described above while suppressing the excessive increase.

<Structure of register 403b of sound output LSI 403>
Next, refer to FIG. 37 for the configuration of the register 403b used for instructing the sound output LSI 403 from the MPU 402 to output the sound and transferring the sound data stored in the common ROM 404 from the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402. I will explain while doing. FIG. 37 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the register 403b.

As shown in FIG. 37, the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403 is based on the areas 9523a to 9523e where data is set when the sound output LSI 403 is instructed by the MPU 402 and the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. The buffers 9524a to 9524e for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 404, the area 9525 where the data is set when the data transfer instruction is given to the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403. Areas 9526 for recognizing the internal state in the MPU 402 are provided separately.

More specifically, the areas 9523a to 9526 described above are the area 9523a for the first parameter, the area 9523b for the second parameter, and the area 9523c for the third parameter as the area where the data is set when the sound output instruction is given. It also has a plurality of parameter areas 9523a to 9523d such as the fourth parameter area 9523d. In addition, an area 9523e for sequence data is provided.

In the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter, parameter data necessary for outputting a melody or a sound effect is stored, and parameter data necessary for outputting voice is stored. By providing a plurality of parameter areas 9523a to 9523d in this way, it is possible to simultaneously pronounce a plurality of sounds. Further, the sequence data already described is stored in the sequence data area 9523e.

Incidentally, since the sound output LSI 403 has a function for 16 channels, parameter data for a plurality of (specifically, 4) channels are stored in the area for one parameter. Further, in the configuration using the virtual track, a larger number of parameters may be stored in the area for one parameter.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is provided as an area where data is set when a data transfer instruction is given from the MPU 402 to the sound output LSI 403. In the transfer instruction area 9525, the address data of the light emission data required for the MPU 402 is stored, and the data for giving the transfer instruction of the light emission data read from the common ROM 404 to the sound output LSI 403 to the MPU 402 is stored. ..

A plurality of external read buffers 9524a to 9524e are provided as areas for temporarily storing and holding the data read from the common ROM 404 based on the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. The light emission data required for the MPU 402 is temporarily stored in the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and is transferred to the MPU 402 when a predetermined reading timing is reached.

A flag area 9526 is provided as an area for recognizing the internal state of the sound output LSI 403 in the MPU 402. As the flag area 9526, for example, a read completion flag is provided, and when the transfer of the corresponding data from the common ROM 404 to the external read buffers 9524a to 9524e is completed in response to the data transfer instruction from the MPU 402. In addition, "1" is stored in the read completion flag, and the fact is grasped in the MPU 402.

The areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are all accessible areas from the MPU 402, but the areas 9523a to 9523e, 9525 to 9526 and the buffers 9524a to 9524e are simultaneously accessed. Instead, the accessible target can be switched. That is, the number of areas that can be accessed simultaneously in the MPU 402 corresponds to the number of the first signal path to the eighth signal path (eight in the present embodiment) constituting the bus B1 between the MPU 402 and the sound output LSI 403. There is.

Specifically, as the first area 9521a corresponding to the first signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523a for the first parameter and the buffer 9524a for external reading of 1 are allocated to form the bus B1. As the second area 9521b corresponding to the second signal path, the area 9523b for the second parameter and the buffer 9524b for external reading of 1 are assigned, and the third area corresponding to the third signal path constituting the bus B1 is assigned. The area 9523c for the third parameter and the buffer 9524c for external reading of 1 are assigned as the 9521c, and the area 9523d for the fourth parameter is assigned as the fourth area 9521d corresponding to the fourth signal path constituting the bus B1. And 1 external read buffer 9524d is allocated. Further, as the fifth area 9521e corresponding to the fifth signal path constituting the bus B1, the area 9523e for sequence data and the buffer 9524e for external reading of 1 are allocated.

A transfer instruction area 9525 is assigned as an area corresponding to the sixth signal path constituting the bus B1, and a flag area 9526 is assigned as an area corresponding to the seventh signal path constituting the bus B1. ..

Selectors 9522a to 9522e are provided for the registers 403b corresponding to the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e, and the selectors 9522a to 9522e cause the MPU 402 as the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e. The accessible area can be switched. Then, this switching is performed through binary switching to the selector area 9527 provided in the register 403b corresponding to the eighth signal path constituting the bus B1.

Specifically, when the information in the selector area 9527 is "0", which is the initial value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are controlled by sound output by setting the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to the areas 9523a to 9523e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the initial value, the MPU 402 can access the areas 9523a to 9523d for each parameter and the area 9523e for the sequence data, and sounds to the sound output LSI 403. It is in a state where it is possible to give an output instruction. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in the first interference state with the MPU 402.

When the information of the selector area 9527 is "1" which is the switching execution value, the first area 9521a to the fifth area 9521e are the buffers for external reading 9524a depending on the setting of the access target area by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. It corresponds to ~ 9524e. That is, when the information in the selector area 9527 is the switching execution value, the MPU 402 can access the buffers 9524a to 9524e for external reading, and can read the data for which the transfer instruction has been given. It becomes. That is, the sound output LSI 403 is in a second interference state with the MPU 402.

On the other hand, the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 are not subject to switching by the selectors 9522a to 9522e. Therefore, the MPU 402 can access the transfer instruction area 9525, the flag area 9526, and the selector area 9527 regardless of the interference state of the sound output LSI 403.

The display control device 500 includes a display control board 501, an MPU 502, a program ROM 512 and a work RAM 513 constituting the MPU 502, a video display processor (VDP) 505, a character ROM 506, and a video RAM 507. Here, the MPU 502 is an element in which a CPU, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are combined into a chip in addition to the program ROM 512 and the work RAM 513. The MPU 502, VDP 505, character ROM 506, and video RAM 507 are mounted on the display control board 501.

The MPU 502 controls the VDP 505 based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400. Specifically, the MPU 502 controls the VDP505 by analyzing the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 400 and generating a command for the VDP505 based on the analysis result.

The program ROM 512 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data, is a non-volatile memory that does not require external power supply for holding the stored information, and cannot be written. It is a semiconductor element. This program ROM 512 has various areas such as various data storage areas. These areas will be described in detail later.

The work RAM 513 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing a control program stored in the program ROM 512, and is volatile and requires an external power supply for holding the stored information. It is a memory. The work RAM 513 has various areas such as various counter areas and various flag storage areas. These areas will be described in detail later. In the present embodiment, a volatile memory such as DRAM or SRAM is used as the work RAM 513, but a non-volatile memory such as MRAM may be used.

The VDP505 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 91. Since the VDP505 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip having a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 505 reads image data from the character ROM 506 based on the content of the command generated by the MPU 502, and stores the image data in the video RAM 507.

The character ROM 506 stores in advance various image data (image information) including sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 91, background data, and moving image data, and functions as an image data library. The character ROM 506 holds bitmap format image data of various symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining an expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM 507 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 91, and the display content of the symbol display device 91 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 507.

Returning to the explanation of the voice emission control device 400, the MPU 402 recognizes that it is necessary to start the effect for the game round by receiving the variable command transmitted from the main control device 300, and the effect for the game round. Execute the start process. Further, by receiving the end command transmitted from the main control device 300, it is recognized that it is necessary to end the effect for the game round, and the game round effect end process is executed. Further, by receiving various commands for the jackpot effect transmitted from the main control device 300, it is recognized that the jackpot effect needs to be started or progressed, and the jackpot effect process is executed. Further, by receiving the demo display command transmitted from the main control device 300, it is recognized that the demo display needs to be started, and the demo display process is executed. The command reception from the main control device 300 in the MPU 402 is not limited to the configuration in which the command is directly received from the main control device 300, and may be a configuration in which the command relayed by the relay board is received. ..

In the game rounding effect start processing, based on both the variable command and the type command, the variable display time grasping process for grasping the variable display time (display continuation period) of the corresponding game round and the presence / absence of reach display are grasped. The reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process for grasping the presence or absence of the jackpot result, and the jackpot type grasping process for grasping the jackpot type when the jackpot result occurs are executed. Further, based on the grasp results in the reach display grasping process, the jackpot result occurrence grasping process, and the jackpot type grasping process, the display effect for determining the type of display effect to be performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 in this game round. In addition to executing the grasping process, the symbol type grasping process for determining the type of the symbol to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 is executed in this game. Then, based on the result of each of these grasping processes, the display control device 500 displays a variation pattern command including information on the variation display time and information on the type of display effect, and a symbol designation command including information on the type of symbol to be finally stopped and displayed. Send to.

Further, in the game rounding effect start process, in addition to the above-mentioned grasping processes, a notice display lottery process for whether or not to display a notice is executed. In this case, in the lottery process, the type lottery of the notice display is also executed. Then, if the notice display is won, a notice command including information on the type of the notice display is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the game rounding effect start processing, based on the processing results of each of the above processes, the light emitting data for the game round (including the sequence data and the parameter data) and the sound data for the game round (sequence data and the parameter data) are combined. (Including) is read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the light emitting mode by the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C are defined.

In the game round production end process, the light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the audio output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the current game round are terminated. Further, in the game rounding effect end process, an end command including information for terminating the game rounding effect is transmitted to the display control device 500. In the jackpot production process, based on the various commands for jackpot production received, the production mode such as opening, each round, between each round, and ending is grasped, and the jackpot production corresponding to the grasped result is used. Command is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, based on the grasped result, the display data for the jackpot effect, the sequence data for the jackpot effect, the parameter data and the sound data, and the light emission data are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the display lamp devices 23A and 23B during the jackpot effect are read. It defines the light emitting mode and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the demo display process, the demo display effect mode is grasped based on the received demo display command, and the demo display command corresponding to the grasped result is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, based on the grasped result, the light emission data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) and the sound data for demo display (including sequence data and parameter data) are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. It defines the light emitting mode of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the sound output mode from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the demo display. The process executed by the MPU 402 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 300 includes a process for controlling light emission of various lamp units 95 to 97 in addition to the above process.

Further, the MPU 402 recognizes that the operation button 35 has been operated by receiving an operation signal transmitted from the operation button 35 based on the operation of the operation unit of the operation button 35, and performs an operation correspondence process. Execute. In addition, even when the operated state is canceled, it is recognized by the falling edge of the operation signal, and the operation correspondence process is executed. In the operation correspondence process, the operation mode is specified according to the type of the operation signal, and the operation generation command including the information that the operation button 35 is operated and the information of the operation mode is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the operation correspondence process, when the operation of the operation unit is canceled (cancelled), the operation cancellation command is transmitted to the display control device 500. Further, in the operation correspondence process, in addition to the transmission of the above command, the light emission mode of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the output mode of the sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C correspond to the operation of the operation button 35. Prescribe.

Next, the connection relationship between the DAC 403d included in the sound output LSI and the speaker units 26A to 26C will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker unit included in the sound output LSI.
As shown in FIG. 38, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from a sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a to 403d2c that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. .. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker unit 26A, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker unit 26B, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c is the speaker. It is output to the unit 26C.
That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can independently control the magnitude of the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 35, the program and processing data for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 are different from the power recovery notification process and the normal notification process. It's different. Specifically, the parameter data that defines the reproduction volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c is different. More specifically, the notification process for power recovery is different from the notification process for normal operation. Specifically, the parameter data that defines the reproduction volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c is different.

More specifically, in the power recovery notification process, the parameter data is set so that the reproduction volume in each of the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10, in other words, the amplification factors of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c are the same. On the other hand, in the normal notification processing, the reproduction volume in the speaker unit 26A provided in the pachinko machine 10 is amplified so as to be smaller than the reproduction volume in the other speaker units 26B and 26C. Parameter data is specified so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplification circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open, the playback volume in the speaker unit 26A is set to be lower than that in the other speaker units 26B and 26C. ing. In the present invention, the phrase "reducing the reproduction volume" includes a mode in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the playback volume of the speaker units 26A among the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, so that the pachinko machine 10 can play a game in the next seat. The risk that the playing player will be annoyed by the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is a speaker arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14), in other words, on a side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. Decrease the playback volume of unit 26A. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.
Further, the pachinko machine 10 has a speaker unit 26B and a speaker arranged on the support side of the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14), in other words, on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. Do not reduce the playback volume of unit 26C. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the notification sound.

<Timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the voice emission control device. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes a timer interrupt process for advancing the game. In this timer interrupt process, the MPU 402 periodically (for example, a 2 msec cycle) executes the timer interrupt process of FIG. 39.

In step S1401, the MPU 402 executes a command storage process. In this command storage process, when the MPU 402 receives a command from the MPU 302, the MPU 402 stores the received command in the RAM 413. Specifically, the RAM 413 has a ring buffer for storing and reading commands received from the MPU 302, and the MPU 402 stores the commands in the ring buffer in the order received from the MPU 302. The MPU 402 reads commands from the ring buffer in the order stored in the ring buffer.

In step S1402, the MPU 402 executes the effect determination process based on the command received from the MPU 302 of the main control device 300. In the effect determination process, the MPU 402 executes an effect for a game round, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In step S1403, the MPU 402 executes the demo display execution process based on the command received from the MPU 302. In the demo display execution process, the MPU 402 executes the demo display when a predetermined start waiting period (for example, 3 sec) for starting the demo has elapsed without starting a new game round after the end of the game round. .. The effect determination process in step S1402 will be described in detail later.

In step S1404, the MPU 402 controls the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the first to third holding lamp units 95a to 96 based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1402 and the demo display execution process of step S1403. Executes the light emission control process of. In step S1405, the MPU 402 executes a voice control process for voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the contents of the effect determination process of step S1402 and the demo display execution process of step S1403.

In step S1406, the MPU 402 is based on the contents of the power recovery notification process (step S416) of the main process (see FIG. 25) and the normal time notification process (step S1303) of the front door frame opening monitoring process (FIG. 34). Then, an abnormality notification process is performed. The details of this abnormality notification process will be described later.
After that, the MPU 402 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect determination process. The MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect determination process in order to execute the effect for the game round, the effect for the open / close execution mode, and the like.

In step S1501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the variation command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 302 have been received. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1501 that each command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1509. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that each command has been received in step S1501 (YES), the game result is "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" based on the content of the type command in step S1502. It is determined whether or not it is.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1503. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the same odd number or the same even number is used as the stop result to finally display the stop on the stop symbol effective line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers (for example, "1 ・ 1 ・ 1" or "2 ・ 2 ・ 2") is determined and it is determined that the game result is a "low probability result", the stop symbol valid line The information related to the combination of symbols (for example, "2.2.2") having the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on L is determined. The odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1502 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" or the "low probability result" (NO), in step S1504, the game result is "normally out of order" based on the content of the type command. It is determined whether or not it is a "result". When the MPU 402 determines in step S1504 that the game result is not a "normal deviation result" (NO), that is, the game result is a "special deviation result", an "unspecified small round high probability result", and an "explicit small round high". If it is determined to be one of the "confirmed results", the common symbol determination process is executed in step S1505. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 402 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result for finally displaying a stop on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a "normally out-of-order result" in the winning / failing lottery (for example). "3.4.1") is decided. The combination of these special symbols is the same regardless of the type of game result.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1504 that the game result is a "normal deviation result" (YES), the MPU 402 executes a symbol determination process for normal deviation in step S1506. In this pattern determination process for normal deviation, the MPU 402 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the content of the variable command.

When the MPU 402 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of the reach display symbols as the stop display finally stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. In addition, the combination of the symbols of the reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 402 determines the information related to the combination of symbols different from the combination of the above-mentioned symbols as the stop display finally displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Specifically, the MPU 402 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number, a combination of special symbols, and a combination of symbols different from any of the combinations of the reach display symbols by lottery or the like.

After executing any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, or step S1506, the MPU 402 executes the effect pattern determination process in step S1507. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 402 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the data stored in advance in the ROM 412. Specifically, the MPU 402 selects the effect duration (effect continuation period) and the content of the effect as the effect pattern. Further, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selected effect pattern.

In step S1508, the MPU 402 includes a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any of the processes of step S1503, step S1505, or step S1506, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1507. Is transmitted to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 creates a data table for executing the effect for the game round on the symbol display device 91 from various data storage areas of the program ROM 512 based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 402. read out. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the game round based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400, and the stop result determined by the MPU 402 is displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Finally stop display.

After executing the process of step S1508, or when it is determined in step S1501 that the variable command and the type command have not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes of step S1509 and subsequent steps. In step S1509, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the opening command has been received.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1509 that the opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1513. Further, when it is determined in step S1509 that the MPU 402 has received the opening command (YES), the MPU 402 determines the type of the game result based on the content of the opening command in step S1510.

In step S1511, the MPU 402 executes the effect determination process for the open / close execution mode corresponding to the type of the game result determined in step S1510. In the process of determining the effect for the open / close execution mode, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1510 that the game result is a "special deviation result" or a "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the MPU 402 acts as an effect for the open / close execution mode. Select production A.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is an "explicit small round high accuracy result", the MPU 402 selects the effect B as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is the "most advantageous result", the MPU 402 selects the effect C as the effect for the open / close execution mode. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the game result is a "low probability result", the MPU 402 selects the effect D as the effect for the open / close execution mode. The duration of the effect A and the effect B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, the duration of the effect C and the effect D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed 15 times in the long-time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, in step S1511, the MPU 402 executes light emission control of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and voice control of the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the selection results of the effects A to D.

In step S1512, the MPU 402 transmits a command for opening / closing execution mode including information related to the effect for opening / closing execution mode selected in step S1511 to the display control device 500. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 reads from the program ROM 512 a data table for executing the effect for the open / close execution mode on the symbol display device 91 based on the open / close execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 402. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the effect for the open / close execution mode selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

After executing the process of step S1512, or when it is determined in step S1509 that the opening command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 causes the player to select the mode effect after the jackpot game ends in step S1513. It is determined whether or not to generate the type selection process, and the effect type selection process is executed according to the determination result. This effect type selection process will be described in detail later.

In step S1514, the MPU 402 executes the effect transition process. In the effect transition process, the MPU 402 performs a process of shifting to the mode effect after the jackpot game selected in step S1513. The details of the effect transition process in step S1514 will be described later.

In step S1515, the MPU 402 performs other processing. In other processes, the MPU 402 executes a process for advancing the effect for the open / close execution mode and the effect after the end of the open / close execution mode, based on, for example, the open command, the close command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302. .. After that, the MPU 402 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result and the game state and the like. Specifically, FIG. 41 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state, and the game results are arranged in the column direction and the game state and the like are arranged in the row direction. As shown in FIG. 41, the pachinko machine 10 has, as game results excluding the “normal loss result”, the success / failure result of the “big hit winning” and the “special loss result”, and the “unspecified small round high probability result” and “explicit”. It has "small round high probability result", "most advantageous result", and "low probability result" distribution result.

Here, as shown in the second column of the table in FIG. 41, the "special loss result" is a game result selected when the "big hit winning" is not obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol x in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result selected when a "big hit win" is obtained in the winning / losing lottery (symbol ○ in the figure). Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normal deviation result” and the game state and the like will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the game result and the game state as follows, but the combination of the game result and the game state, the content of the game result, and the game state, etc. The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the "special deviation result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number specified mode instead of the round number specified mode, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, the "special loss result" does not shift to the winning / failing lottery mode. In the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 2 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. Will be done. In addition, in the "unspecified small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. As described above, the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" are different in the type of opening / closing execution mode, but are common in that the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

Further, in the "special off result" and the "unspecified small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect A. This effect A includes an effect for opening the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device in the open / close execution mode, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode. It is composed as a series of productions. In addition, the support mode does not shift in the "special off result" and "unspecified small round high accuracy result". Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 91 does not display an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is a "special off result" or an "unspecified small round high probability result" by checking the stop result and the effect A. In other words, even if the distribution lottery results in an "unspecified small round high probability result" and the mode shifts to the high probability mode, the symbol display device 91 will draw a winning / failing lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The mode is disguised as if it has not changed. Therefore, the player can play the game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

In the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is executed twice in a short time mode. To. In addition, in the "explicit small round high probability result", the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. Further, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the stop result is a combination of special symbols, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect B. This effect B includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured. In addition, in the "explicit small round high accuracy result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Further, in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 91 displays an image clearly indicating that the mode is in the high probability mode on the display screen G. Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the "explicit small round high probability result" by confirming the stop result and the effect for the open / close execution mode.

In the "most advantageous result" and "low probability result", the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed up to 15 times, and the opening / closing of the large winning opening 83a is 15 in a long time mode. It is executed once. Here, in the "most advantageous result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the winning / failing lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode for the open / close execution mode. The production of is production C. This effect C includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured.

Further, in the "low probability result", the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the winning / fail lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode, and the effect for the open / close execution mode is the effect D. Become. Further, in the "most advantageous result" and the "low probability result", the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. This effect D includes an effect for the opening of the open / close execution mode, an effect of opening and closing the variable winning device, and an effect during the ending of the open / close execution mode, as a series of effects. It is configured.

In this embodiment, the production time of each opening effect is the same. Further, in the present embodiment, the production time of each ending effect is the same. However, the production time of the opening effect and the production time of the ending effect are arbitrary, and the production time of the opening effect and the production of the ending effect may be different. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each opening production, or the production time may be different only for a part of the opening production. Further, the production time may be different for each game result, that is, for each ending production, or the production time may be different only for a part of the ending production.

<About the abnormality notification process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S1601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When it is determined in step S1601 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1604. Further, when it is determined in step S1601 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1602. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S1603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in the program for notifying at the time of power recovery and the processing data, the reproduction volumes of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open are the same or substantially the same, in other words, the amplifier circuits 403d2a to. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factors of 403d2c are the same or substantially the same.

In step S1604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1609 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S1604 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S1605. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S1606, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. In this normal time notification program and processing data, the playback volume of the speaker unit 26A when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is set to be lower than the playback volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. Further, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S1607, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1608, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S1603 or step S1606. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S1603 or step S1606, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" During normal operation. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S1603 or step S1606. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S1609, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1609 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1611. When the MPU 402 determines that the back pack unit release command has been received in step S1609 (YES), the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (“door is”) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S1610. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume (output of voice and warning sound such as "Open!"). The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S1610 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Of the sections 26A to 26C, when a specific speaker section, for example, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, only the playback volume of the speaker section 26A that is closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S1610, when the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 has the back pack unit 15 released with the parameter defining the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a of the speaker unit 26A. Control to do so.

In step S1611, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1611 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S1612. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S1611 that the door open notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S1612.
In step 1612, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S1613, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S1613, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads out the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S1614, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S1615, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S1607. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S1607, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. Further, when the BGM is muted in step S1607, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S1607, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. In this case, in step S1608, when the sound data read out in step S1603 or step S1606 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S1607, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S1613. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S1615, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. With such a configuration, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S1609, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command has been received (YES), the process of step S1610 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal benefits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the configuration is such that the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent. In addition, the process of steps S1609 and S1610 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

<Game flow>
FIG. 43 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 10. When the game is started by the pachinko machine 10, the game is started from the first mode M1. The "first mode" (normal mode) is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode and there is no support mode in the gaming state. In the first mode M1, by inserting the game ball into the first starting port 84a, the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate and the game progresses.

If the "unspecified small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the second mode M2 (takeoff mode). The "second mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and there is no support mode in the gaming state. The second mode M2 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode continues until the next big hit.

In addition, if the "explicit small round high accuracy result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the third mode M3 (flight mode). The "third mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The third mode M3 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit.

Further, if the "most advantageous result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). The "fourth mode" is a mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a high-probability mode and the support mode is a gaming state with no limit on the number of times. The fourth mode M4 is a mode in which the next big hit is promised, and the high probability mode and the support mode continue until the next big hit. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of types of effects MA to MC (three types in the present embodiment) having different effects as the effects of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode).

In the present embodiment, during the production of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result", more specifically, during the round game, the effect type selection effect of selecting the effect type in the fourth mode M4 is executed, and the fourth mode is executed. An image for selecting the effect of M4 is displayed on the display screen G. When the player operates the operation button 35 and selects a favorite effect from the effects MA to MC displayed on the display screen G, the effect in the fourth mode M4 that shifts after the game of the "most advantageous result" is selected. It will be a directed production. Since the next big hit is promised in the fourth mode M4, the fourth mode M4 continues until the next big hit.

Further, if the "low probability result" is won in the first mode M1, the mode shifts to the fifth mode M5 (revenge mode). The "fifth mode" is a game state mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode up to a limit of 100 times. In the 5th mode M5, the next big hit is not guaranteed, and if the support mode wins the big hit again by the limit of 100 times, the revenge will be successful, but the support mode will be up to the limit of 100 times. If the jackpot is not won again, the revenge fails, the high frequency support ends, and the winning / losing lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode and the first mode M1 having no support mode.

The game flow shown in FIG. 43 shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all the game flows of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. For example, in the present embodiment, the mode transition is not performed for the special deviation result (small hit result), but as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has the “special deviation result (small hit result)”. The "special omission result" does not trigger the transition to the win / fail lottery mode or the support mode, but it does trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode. Therefore, it may be configured to shift to the mode when the "special out-of-order result" is won.

<Example of production image>
Next, the effect image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with an example. When the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined by the MPU 302 of the main control device 300, and the fluctuation display is performed in the main display unit 93. As described above, the main display unit 93 The display area of is set to be extremely small, and it is difficult for a player who is paying attention to various effects executed by the symbol display device 91 to easily recognize each information in the lit state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 3, a variable display effect using a decorative figure as an effect symbol is performed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91. Note that the background image is not shown in FIG. 44 described below.

<Before fluctuation display>
FIG. 44 (A): In the state before the special figure 1 starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large column of decorative figures, which is an effect pattern, is displayed in the screen of the display screen G. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, the decorative drawings of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are also in a state of being stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 44 (B): In synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen of the display screen G. That is, in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, each decorative figure of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction in the display screen of the display screen G to produce the variation display. Is started. In FIG. 44, the variable display of each symbol display column Z1 to Z3 is indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Will be done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape such as an airfield. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, the "first mode". In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the "first mode" is a gaming state (normal mode) in which the winning / failing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode. In addition to this, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with various effect modes, and different background images are prepared for each effect mode. The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal difference between the "win / fail lottery mode" and the "support mode". Although not particularly shown in FIG. 44, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a specific character, item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 44 (C): When a predetermined time (for example, about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the symbol display column Z1 first stops the fluctuation display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 44 (D): Following the symbol display column Z1, the symbol display column Z3 stops the variable display. In this example, it means that the decorative figure representing the number "3" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear in appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "sliding pattern" is, for example, once a decorative figure representing the number "7" is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the symbol display column slides by one symbol and the decorative figure representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed. By doing so, it develops into reach. Alternatively, once the decorative drawing representing the number "9" is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative drawing slides in the opposite direction by one symbol and the decorative drawing representing the number "8" is stopped and displayed, thereby reaching the reach. A pattern that develops is also conceivable. In addition, after a temporary stop display of an effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is displayed, a character appears on the screen and the variable display of the symbol display column Z3 is restarted. A pattern in which the decorative figure representing "8" is stopped and displayed and develops into reach is also conceivable.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 44 (E): The last symbol display column Z2 stops the variable display in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. When the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed in the mode of non-winning (missing), the combination of non-winning (missing) is also stopped and displayed in the decorative drawing. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 44 (E), it is shown that the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed on the stop symbol effective line L, and in this case, the combination of the decorative drawings is "8.1".・ Because it is a misalignment of "3", it is expressed in the production that it corresponds to the normal "missing" in this fluctuation.

As described above, with reference to FIG. 44, an example of the fluctuation display and the stop display (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the decorative drawing for each fluctuation has been described. Through the effect displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 91, the player is expected to win or miss the big hit, and finally the result of the internal lottery is clearly taught in the effect. Can be done.

<Example of variable display effect>
45 and 46 show the case where the big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery in the first mode M1 (the winning / losing lottery mode is a low probability mode and there is no support mode), and the result is sorted to the “most advantageous result” ( It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the production C executed in the so-called first hit). In the following description, the description of matters common to the above-mentioned production examples will be omitted. Note that the background image is not shown in FIGS. 45 and 46.

<Before the start of variable display production>
FIG. 45 (A): The symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in large size on the display screen G. In each of the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3, the combination of decorative figures representing the numbers "9, 1, 3" is stopped and displayed.

<Start of variable display production>
FIG. 45 (B): The variable display effect is started by scrolling the symbol display columns Z1 to Z3 on the display screen G.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z1>
FIG. 45 (C): The symbol display column Z1 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 45 (C), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display of symbol display column Z3>
FIG. 45 (D): The symbol display column Z3 is stopped and displayed on the display screen G. In FIG. 45 (D), the decorative drawing representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed.

<Stop display effect>
FIG. 45 (E): The symbol display column Z2 is stopped and displayed in synchronization with the stop display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. Normally, if the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, the decorative figure, which is an effect symbol displayed on the display screen G, is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. However, in FIG. 45 (E), the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "most advantageous result", and the decorative figure representing the number "1" is stopped and displayed in the symbol display column Z2.

<Direction in open / close execution mode>
When the combination of the jackpot decorations is stopped and displayed on the display screen G, the open / close execution mode is set, and the effect of the open / close execution mode according to the lottery result of the jackpot is executed on the display screen G. Specifically, the effect C is executed as an effect of the opening / closing execution mode of the "most advantageous result" which is the result of the internal lottery.

FIG. 46 (F): The opening effect is executed when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. In this opening effect, for example, the background image displayed on the display screen G is greatly changed, and the character image G1 such as "BONUS!" Is displayed on the display screen G in a large size, and the player wins the jackpot. Be notified. If the player can be notified that the jackpot has been won, the player may be notified by another mode (for example, voice output).

FIG. 46 (G): Next, in order to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed, for example, a character image G2 of "Right-handed!" And a right-pointing arrow are displayed large on the display screen G. The arrow. At this time, a right-pointing arrow is displayed on the right side of the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" So that the right-handed game is emphasized. Further, in accordance with the notification of the right-handed game on the display screen G, for example, the voice of "Right-handed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In the pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. 2, the variable winning device 83 is provided on the right side of the game board 81, and in order to make the game ball win the big winning opening 83a of the variable winning device 83, the firing handle 41 The rotation operation amount is maximized, and the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area 104 is shifted from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 103 is formed to the side of the opposite side (so-called right-handed strike). As shown in FIG. 46 (G), the player is notified that the right-handed game is to be performed. The right-pointing arrow and the character image G3 of "Right-handed!" May be displayed so as to flow from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen. As a result, even a player who cannot understand Japanese can intuitively understand that he / she plays a right-handed game. Further, in the following description, the right-handed navigation which is a suggestion of the right-handed game in the big hit game state is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for the big hit game.

FIG. 46 (H): Following the opening effect, an effect of a situation in which the variable winning device is opened and closed is executed. In this production, for example, a battle production is performed. This battle effect is performed for the purpose of notifying the player that the character on the player side and the enemy character battle and win the battle to shift to the high probability mode after the big hit game. Further, on the upper end side of the display screen G, a plurality of characters "right-handed" and a plurality of right-pointing arrows "→" are displayed to indicate that the right-handed game is continued. Further, the character "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow "→" may be displayed so as to flow from the left end to the right end of the display screen G.

FIG. 46 (I): Further, during the production of the situation where the variable winning device is opened and closed, the effect type for allowing the player to select the effect mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, which was described in step S1513 of FIG. 40. The selection effect is executed. In this effect type selection effect, the player presses down the left direction button 35b and / or the right direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and prefers from the images GA to GC indicating the effect type displayed on the display screen G. Select an image that shows the type of effect. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the image GA is an image representing the effect MA, the image GB is an image representing the effect MB, and the image GC is an image representing the effect MC. When the player presses down the operation button 35 to select one of the images GA to GC, the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other unselected images and is selected. Is configured to be explicitly stated. When the player selects a desired effect and then presses down the determination button 35a of the operation button 35, the effect corresponding to the selected image is determined as the effect of the fourth mode M4.

In the present embodiment, when the player does not select / determine the desired effect within a predetermined time, specifically, by the final round, the 15th round, the effect predetermined by the initial setting (this implementation). In the embodiment, the effect MA) is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. If the player does not select / determine the effect mode within a predetermined time, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G after the predetermined time has elapsed is automatically selected as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the effect MB corresponding to the selected image GB (the image GB displayed larger than the other images on the display screen G) is automatically set as the effect in the fourth mode M4. Is selected for.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 46 (I), the selected image is displayed on the display screen G larger than the other images, but the player can use the left direction button 35b of the operation button 35 and the left direction button 35b. / Or when the right direction button 35c is pressed down, the images GA to GC corresponding to the effects MA to MC may be moved to the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (J), since the image GB corresponding to the effect MB is selected, the image GB is arranged in the center of the display screen G. In the example shown in FIG. 46 (J), the image GB being selected is arranged in the center of the display screen G in order to clearly show the selected image to the player, and other images are selected. The image GB is displayed on the outermost surface by displaying (superimposing) on the non-image GA and GC, and it is clearly shown that the image GB is selected. In addition, in order to show the selected image more clearly to the player, the selected image GB may be displayed larger than the other unselected images GA and GC.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46 (J), the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected may be displayed as a gauge. For example, a gauge image G4 showing the time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is displayed below the image GB, the remaining time during which the effects MA to MC can be selected is shown in red, and the gauge image G4 is shown with the passage of time. The red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 46 (J)) is reduced, specifically, the boundary line L1 between the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion) becomes with the passage of time. It may be configured to move to the left side toward the display screen G. Further, the red region G4a (shaded portion in FIG. 46 (J)) of the gauge image G4 increases with the passage of time, specifically, the red region G4a (shaded portion) and the white region G4b (white portion). The boundary line L1 of the above may be configured to move to the right side toward the display screen G with the passage of time. Further, details of the selected effect, for example, an explanation of what kind of effect the selected effect is, may be displayed on the display screen G. In this case, the attribute information (metadata) in which each effect content is described is stored in the ROM 412 or the like, and the MPU 402 stores the attribute information (meta data) of the selected effect based on the operation signal of the operation button 35 in the ROM 412. Read from, and send a command instructing the display control device 500 to display the read attribute information on the display screen G. Further, the attribute information of the effect is stored in various data storage areas of the program ROM 512, and the attribute information (metadata) of the effect being selected by the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 based on the operation signal of the operation button 35. May be transmitted from the various data storage areas of the program ROM 512 to instruct the display control device 500 to display the information on the display screen G. Further, the music used in the selected effect may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. At this time, the music output in the current production is temporarily stopped, and the music used in the selected production is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In this way, by presenting the details of the selected effect to the player, the player can easily select the effect that suits his / her taste, and the interest is enhanced.

<Production type (type) selection process>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type (type) selection process. As described above, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1513 of the effect determination process of FIG. 40.
In step S1701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. 40. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1701 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1702 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the opening command. The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1702 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1702 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process of step S1702 is executed and reaches 5000 times, and 10 sec has elapsed. judge. The configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, the predetermined time may be measured using a real-time clock (RTC). When it is determined in step S1702 that the predetermined time has not elapsed since the reception of the opening command (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1702 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S1703. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display the image of the effect type selection effect on the display screen G. As mentioned above, the effect type selection effect is the effect of the 4th mode M4, which shifts to the player when the player wins a big hit in the winning / losing lottery and is assigned to the "most advantageous result". The type mode is selected from MA, MB, and MC. The player operates the operation button 35 in this effect type selection effect to select a desired effect mode.

In step S1704, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S1704, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. do. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S1705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. Specifically, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted in the state where the image GA is selected, the MPU 402 in step S1706 shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in the fourth mode M4. Set as a production. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S1706. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S1705, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S1706. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, when it is determined in step S1705 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S1707 whether the predetermined time has elapsed. The MPU 402 determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed by counting the number of times the process of step S1707 is executed. For example, when the predetermined time is 10 sec and the interval for repeatedly executing the process of step S1707 is 2 msec, the MPU 402 counts the number of times the process of step S1707 is executed and reaches 5000 times, and 10 sec has elapsed. judge. Further, the configuration for measuring the predetermined time is arbitrary, and for example, a real-time clock (RTC) may be used to measure the predetermined time.

When the predetermined time has elapsed in step S1707 (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect (in this embodiment, the effect MA) predetermined by the initial setting as the effect in the fourth mode M4 in step S1708. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. As described above, in step S1707, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. good.

If the predetermined time has not elapsed in step S1707 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

<Other examples of production type selection processing>
Instead of measuring the predetermined time in steps S1702 and S1707 of FIG. 47, the determination process of S1702 and step S1707 may be performed based on the number of rounds of the jackpot game. For example, the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be counted based on the number of received open commands and round start commands (hereinafter, also referred to as open commands) in step S1005 of FIG. In this case, in step S1702, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 3 (third round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 3, the effect type selection effect of step S1703 is performed. In step S1707, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the number of received open commands and the like is 15 (the 15th round, which is the final round), and if the number of received open commands and the like is 15, step S1708. You may set the effect of the initial setting of.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a flowchart in another example of the effect type selection process. As described above, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process in step S1513 of the effect determination process of FIG. 40.
In step S1801, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the type command received in step S1501 of FIG. 40. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S1801 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), the MPU 402 sets a counter in step S1802 to measure the number of open commands and the like received after receiving the opening command. ..

In step S1802, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the gaming state is the third round of the jackpot game. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time the opening command or the like is received, and determines whether or not the number of receiving the opening command or the like is 3 (third round). When it is determined in step S1803 that the number of received open commands or the like is not 3 or more (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

Further, when the number of received open commands and the like is 3 or more in step S1803 (YES), the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect in step S1804. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display an image of the effect type selection effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 46 (I) on the display screen G. indicate.

In step S1805, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S1805, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. do. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S1806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When the MPU 402 determines in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the fourth mode M4. That is, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GA selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MA as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MA after the first mode M1 in step S1807. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

Further, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MB after the first mode M1 in step S1807. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. Further, in step S1806, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the fourth mode M4 that shifts the effect MC after the first mode M1 in step S1807. do. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4.

The MPU 402 determines in step S1808 whether or not a release command or the like has been received. If it is determined in step S1808 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1808 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1809 whether the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives an open command or the like after receiving the opening command, and determines whether the number of received open commands or the like is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round. judge.

If it is determined in step S1809 that the number of received open commands or the like is not 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (NO), the MPU 402 cancels the effect determined for the player in step S1810. Instruct to give a notification to confirm. Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to display a character image confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and displays a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads out the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412, and inputs the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If it is determined in step S1809 that the number of received open commands and the like is 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round (YES), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

In step S1811, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S1806 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the player's operation button 35. If it is determined in step S1811, that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402 returns to the operation of step S1805. If it is determined in step S1811 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

Further, when it is determined in step S1806 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines whether or not the release command or the like has been received in step S1812. If it is determined in step S1812 that the release command or the like has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. If it is determined in step S1812 that the release command or the like has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines in step S1813 whether the gaming state is the final round of the jackpot game, that is, the 15th round. Specifically, after receiving the opening command, the MPU 402 increments the counter each time it receives a release command or the like, and the number of open commands or the like received reaches 15 or more (15th round), which is the final round. Judge whether or not.

If it is determined in step S1813 that it is the 15th round (YES), the MPU 402 performs the effect (in this embodiment, the effect MA) predetermined by the initial setting in step S1814 in the fourth mode M4. Set as. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the fourth mode M4. If it is determined in step S1813 that it is the final round (15th round) (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G is automatically determined as the effect in the fourth mode M4. You may do so. When the effect is set in step S1814, the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is not determined in step S1813 that it is the final round (15th round) (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to notify the player to select / determine the effect in step S1815. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the display control device 500 so as to display a character image prompting the selection / decision of the effect such as "determine the effect!" Or "determine the effect!" On the display screen G. Control. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and the display screen G displays "determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!", Etc. Display a character image that prompts you to select and decide. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412. It is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ..

It should be noted that the timing at which the effect type selection effect is started is arbitrary, and for example, the number of received open commands and the like may be 1 (1st round) or more and 15 or less (15th round). Further, the number of rounds for starting the effect type selection effect may be randomly determined using the counter stored in the RAM 413. Further, in the above explanation, the effect can be canceled according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game (specifically, the effect can be canceled until the 14th round), but until the predetermined time or the number of rounds elapses. The configuration may be such that the production can be canceled.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, a process of shifting to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result" will be described. Normally, when a big hit is won in the winning / failing lottery, the effect of the opening / closing execution mode according to the distribution result is executed, and after the ending period ends, the effect of the next mode is started. However, in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, when a big hit is won in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes the "most advantageous result", the effect C of the opening / closing execution mode according to the most advantageous result is executed. Then, the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C.

Specifically, it is controlled so that the output of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started during the ending period of the production C corresponding to the most advantageous result. In the present embodiment, the timing of starting the output of music and sound from the speaker units 26A to 26C changes according to the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47. In the following description, in the production of the fourth mode M4, the music production is referred to as a music production, and the video production displayed on the display screen G is also referred to as a video production.

Hereinafter, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 49. In this embodiment, there are three types of effects of the fourth mode M4, the effects MA to MC, and the transition process is different for each effect MA to MC. Hereinafter, the details of the transition processing of each effect MA to MC will be described. In the following description, the right-handed navigation that suggests a right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) is also referred to as a right-handed navigation for RUSH.

<Transition process to production MA: Fig. 49 (a)>
First, a case where the effect MA is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MA, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MA, the ending period of the production C and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production MA of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MA, the sound of "ARUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW1, and the audio output of "A RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW1 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "ARUSH rush" from the ending period or the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the ending period or the output period of the intro portion is 10 sec and the output time of the voice of "ARUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW1 is 8 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "ARUSH rush" is started 8 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

At the end of the ending period, the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the "right-handed" voice is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video effect of the effect MA is controlled to start. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Be controlled.

<Transition process to production MB: Fig. 49 (b)>
Next, a case where the effect MB is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MB, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MB of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MB, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production MB of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MB, the sound of "BRUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "B RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW2, and the audio output of "B RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW2 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "BRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the output period of the intro portion is 11 sec and the output time of the voice of "BRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW2 is 9 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "BRUSH rush" is started 9 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

Here, in this transition process to the effect MB, the sound of "BRUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C over T2 at the end of the ending period. Therefore, when the voice of "right-handed" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at the end of the ending period, the voice of "BRUSH rush" and the voice of "right-handed" are output in an overlapping manner. Will be done. Therefore, in the transition process to this production MB, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed at T2 at the end of the ending period without outputting the voice of "Right-handed". Is displayed on the display screen G, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video effect of the effect MB is controlled to be started.

<Transition process to production MC: Fig. 49 (c)>
Next, a case where the effect MC is set as the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. In the transition process to the production MC, the output of the intro part of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T1 at the start of the ending period of the production C corresponding to the "most advantageous result". Is controlled to start. Here, in the production MC, the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production MC of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period of the production C. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process to the effect MC, the sound of "CRUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. Specifically, the audio output of "C RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW3, and the audio output of "C RUSH rush" is output at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to end. Here, the voice start time TW3 is the time obtained by subtracting the voice output time of "CRUSH rush" from the output period of the intro portion. For example, if the output period of the intro portion is 6 sec and the output time of the voice of "CRUSH rush" is 2 sec, the voice start time TW3 is 4 sec. In this case, it is controlled so that the output of the voice of "CRUSH rush" is started 4 seconds after T1 at the start of the ending period.

In addition, in the production MC, following the output of the voice of "CRUSH rush", the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period, it is simultaneous with or omitted from T2. At the same time, the output of the "Please hit right" voice is controlled to end. In other words, the voice output time of "Please hit right" is the time obtained by subtracting the output period of the intro part from the ending period. Further, in the transition process to the production MC, at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4, characters such as "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH starts.

<Production data>
Next, the data used for the process of shifting to the effect of the fourth mode M4 will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 37, the music data and the voice data used in each of the effects MA to MC of the fourth mode M4 are stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 of the voice emission control device 400 as sequence data, parameter data and sound data, respectively. It is stored. Specifically, the ROM 412 stores sequence data and parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C used in the effects MA to MC, and the common ROM 404 is used in the effects MA to MC, respectively. Sound data corresponding to the music data A to C to be performed is stored. Then, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the sequence data and the parameter data corresponding to the music data A to C from the ROM 412 and the sound data from the common ROM 404 and output them from the speaker units 26A to 26C as needed. .. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the read music data A to C are set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A to C are output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ) Is controlled by the sound output LSI 403.

Here, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC by the data table stored in the ROM 412. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 uses the ROM 412 and the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A. It is read from the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In addition, the music data A to C have an intro part (prelude), an A melody part (the first melody of the song), a B melody part (the melody that comes after the A melody), a chorus part (chorus), an interlude, and an out mouth, respectively. It is composed of multiple sections such as (sequel). An example of a general music composition is shown below. The following Examples A and B are merely examples, and the composition of music used in this embodiment is not limited to the examples shown below.
Example A) Intro → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → C melody → chorus → outro Example B) Intro → A melody → B melody → chorus → interlude → B melody → chorus → C melody → outro

Further, the voice data A to E and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 described with reference to FIG. 49 are stored in the common ROM 404 and the ROM 412, respectively. Here, the voice data A to C and the voice start times TW1 to TW3 are associated with each other. The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the voice data stored in the common ROM 404 and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C as needed. Here, the voice data A is "A RUSH rush" and the voice data. B is "B RUSH rush", voice data C is "C RUSH rush", voice data D is "right-handed", and voice data E is "right-handed" as voice data.

Further, the ROM 412 stores the time TE corresponding to the ending period described with reference to FIG. 49. The MPU 402 refers to the time TE corresponding to the ending period stored in the ROM 412 when determining whether or not the ending period has ended.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the audio data A is associated with the effect MA, the audio data B is associated with the effect MB, and the audio data C is associated with the effect MC. Further, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 reads out the audio data A and the audio data D and outputs them from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to do so. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data A and the voice data D are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data A and the voice data D are set. Controls the sound output LSI 403 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.
Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 reads the audio data B and outputs the sound data B from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data B are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data B is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be (reproduced).
Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads out the audio data C and the audio data E and outputs them from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The loudspeaker output LSI 403 is controlled. More specifically, the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the voice data C and the voice data E are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data C and the voice data E are set. Controls the sound output LSI 403 so that is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to read the sound data corresponding to the voice data A to C from the common ROM 404 and output the sound data from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the voice start times TW1 to TW3. Specifically, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data A, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data A after the voice start time TW1 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). Is read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to output the data from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data B, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data B are stored in the ROM 412 and after the voice start time TW2 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to read data from the common ROM 404 and output data from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the MPU 402 outputs the voice data C, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice data C are stored in the ROM 412 and after the voice start time TW3 elapses from the start time T1 of the ending period (see FIG. 49). The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to read from the common ROM 404 and output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Further, the video data used in each effect of the fourth mode M4 is stored in the effect data storage area 1032 of the program ROM 512 included in the MPU 502 of the display control device 500. Specifically, the video data A to D are stored in the effect data storage area 1032. The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read out the video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G in accordance with the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the video data A is associated with the effect MA, the image data B is associated with the effect MB, and the image data C is associated with the effect MC by the data table. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data A and display it on the display screen G. .. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data B and display it on the display screen G. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data C and display it on the display screen G.

Further, the video data D is image data for right-handed navigation for RUSH. The MPU 502 instructs the VDP 52 to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G when performing the right-handed navigation for RUSH. When the video data D for the right-handed navigation for RUSH is stored in the character ROM 506 and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is performed, the MPU 502 reads the video data D from the character ROM 506 and displays it on the display screen G. May be instructed to.

<Transition processing to the 4th mode (RUSH mode)>
Next, the transition process to the fourth mode M4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 50 to 53. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of a transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode). Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the fourth mode (RUSH mode) described with reference to FIG. 49 will be described.

In step S1901, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S1901 that the ending command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 in step S1902. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines the effect type of the fourth mode M4 based on the type of the flag set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1706 or step S1708 of FIG. 47. Further, in step S1901, when it is determined that the ending command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the determination result of step S1902 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MA in step S1903. The process of shifting to the effect MA in step S1903 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. Further, when the determination result of step S1902 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MB in step S1904. The process of shifting to the effect MB in step S1904 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. Further, when the determination result in step S1902 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 executes the transition process to the effect MC in step S1905. The process of shifting to the effect MC in step S1905 will be described with reference to FIG. 53.

In step S1906, the MPU 402 clears the flags set in the various setting flag storage areas in step S1706 or step S1708 of FIG. 47.

<Transition process to production MA>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MA in step S1903 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MA is set.
In step S2001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2004, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW1 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "2 sec" is set for TW1, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1000" as the standby time (standby period) for TW1. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2002, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2006, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2003, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2004, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW1 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2001. When it is determined that the sound start time TW1 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the sound for the effect MA in step S2005. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data A "A RUSH rush" for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data A is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data A "ARUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when it is determined in step S2004 that the voice start time TW1 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MA.

In step S2006, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2002. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2007. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the sound data D “right-handed” for the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data D is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. Further, when it is determined in step S2006 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MA.

In step S2008, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2004 and step S2006 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MB in step S1904 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MB is set.
In step S2101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2104, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW2 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "3 sec" is set for TW2, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "1500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW2. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2102, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2106, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2103, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B for the production MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data B is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW2 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2101. When the MPU 402 determines that the voice start time TW2 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice for the effect MB in step S2105. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the audio data B “B RUSH rush” for the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data B is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data B "BRUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when it is determined in step S2104 that the voice start time TW2 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MB.

In step S2106, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2102. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S2107. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2106 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MB.

In step S2108, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time of step S2104 and step S2106 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the process of shifting to the effect MC in step S1905 of FIG. 50 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process when the effect MC is set.
In step S2201, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2204 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the voice start time TW3 is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and "1 sec" is set for TW3, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "500" as the standby time (standby period) for TW3. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2202, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2206 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2203, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for the production MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C for the production MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data C is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2204, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the voice start time TW3 has elapsed since the ending command was received based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2201. When the MPU 402 determines that the sound start time TW3 has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 starts outputting the sound for the effect MC in step S2205. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data C “CRUSH rush” for the effect MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data C is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data C "CRUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Further, in step S2205, after the output of the audio data C "C RUSH rush" for the effect MC, the MPU 402 shares the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the audio data E "Please hit right" with the ROM 412. It is read from the ROM 404 and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound data E is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data E "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data E "please hit right" is continuously output after the voice data C "CRUSH rush" is output. Therefore, from the speaker units 26A to 26C, after the voice of "CRUSH rush" is output, the voice of "Please hit right" is continuously output. Further, when it is determined in step S2204 that the voice start time TW3 has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MC.

In step S2206, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2202. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S2207. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. Further, when it is determined in step S2206 that the ending period has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process to the effect MC.

In step S2208, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S2204 and S2206 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

In the present embodiment, the transition process to each effect MA to MC has been described assuming that the effect types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are the effect MA, MB, and MC, but the fourth mode M4 The type of effect is not limited to the above three types, and may be arbitrary, and may be two types or four or more types.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side portion of the inner frame 13 with the left side portion of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the portion as the support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player who plays in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player who plays in the left adjacent seat. Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. In this case, in other words, the amplification circuit 403d2b is amplified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The parameters of the program and the processing data stored in the ROM 412 of the speaker light emission control board 401 may be specified so that the rate becomes smaller than the amplification rate of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in, the volume of either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B may be reduced.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the detector is oriented so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The program and processing data whose parameters are specified so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the voice emission control board 401 to reproduce the alarm sound and voice notifying the abnormality. Just do it. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like.

Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the detector opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. Therefore, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes smaller than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. The program and processing data whose parameters are specified so as to be smaller than the amplification factors of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c are read from the ROM 412 of the voice emission control board 401 to reproduce the alarm sound and voice notifying the abnormality. Just do it. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b, or it may be an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like.

<Other examples of abnormality notification processing executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2301, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When it is determined in step S2301 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2304. Further, when it is determined in step S2301 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2302. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2303, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. In this power recovery notification program and processing data, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying an abnormality that the door is open is the same or substantially the same, in other words, the amplification of the amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c. The parameters are specified so that the rates are the same or substantially the same.

In step S2304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2311 described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2304 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2305. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2306, in the MPU 402, the detector was opened with the left side portion of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 as the support side, in other words, the detector opened the right side portion of the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13. It is determined whether or not it is detected.

If it is determined in step S2306 that the right side portion is open (YES), the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification for opening the right side portion in step S2307. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification for opening the right side portion, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. In this program for normal notification for opening the right side portion and processing data, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2b and 403d2c. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2a, or it may be an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a by a selector or the like. Further, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the right side portion is not open (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal notification for opening the left side portion in step S2308. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading a program for normal time notification for opening the left side portion, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. In this program for normal notification for opening the left side portion and processing data, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified is higher than the reproduction volume of the other speaker units 26A and 26C. In other words, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b is smaller than the amplification factor of the other amplifier circuits 403d2a and 403d2c. The parameters may be specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2b becomes zero. Further, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26B may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuit 403d2b, or it may be an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2b by a selector or the like. Further, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2309, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2310, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2303, step S2307 or step S2308. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2303, step S2307 or step S2308, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is generated. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be reproduced (output) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" During normal operation. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2303, step S2307, or step S2308. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2311, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2311 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2313. When the MPU 402 determines that the back pack unit release command has been received in step S2311 (YES), the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal time notification) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2312. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2312 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speaker. Of the sections 26A to 26C, only the playback volume of the specific speaker section, for example, the speaker section 26A or the speaker section 26B that is closest to the ear of the player playing in the adjacent seat when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened. It may be controlled to be small. Here, in step S2306, if the right side portion is open, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, and if the left side portion of the sound output LSI 403 is open, the sound output LSI 403 is controlled. It is controlled so that only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B is reduced.

In step S2312, when the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 has the back pack unit 15 released with the parameter defining the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. To control. Further, when controlling so as to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26B by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26B. To control.

In step S2313, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2313 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2314. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2313 that the door open notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2314.
In step 2314, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2315, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2315, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads out the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2316, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2317, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2309. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2309, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2309, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2309, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. In this case, in step S2310, when the sound data whose reading is started in step S2303, step S2307 or S2308 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. May be processed. Further, in step S2309, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2315. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2317, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2311, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command has been received (YES), the process of step S2312 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal benefits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the configuration is such that the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent. It should be noted that the processing of steps S2311 and S2312 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitting bodies of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be configured not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. The possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), a detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the frame body, and a plurality of acoustic devices when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU402) that is controlled to notify an abnormality. Then, when the abnormality notification means notifies the abnormality, the reproduction volume of any one or more of the plurality of audio devices is made smaller than the reproduction volume of the other audio devices (in the present embodiment, the reproduction of the speaker unit 26A). The volume is turned down). Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the right side portion or the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. The abnormality notification means (MPU402) sets the reproduction volume of the acoustic device (speaker section 26A) arranged on a side different from the support side among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C) to another acoustic device (speaker section). Make it lower than the playback volume of 26B, 26C). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 reduces the reproduction volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

(3) The abnormality notification means (MPU402) of the pachinko machine 10 does not reduce the reproduction volume of the sound devices (speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on the support side among the plurality of sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C). In other words, the volume of the sound device (speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on the distant side for the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of the other audio device (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 provided with a dedicated speaker unit for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Game board 81>
FIG. 55 is a front view of the gaming board of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes a speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened in the upper right portion on the front side of the game board 81. As shown in FIG. 55, the speaker unit 26D is provided outside the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame 13 is opened at a position that does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 on the rear side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the back side of the game board 81 (where the back pack unit 15 is provided)). A speaker unit 26E for notifying that the pachinko machine has been used is provided. Since the other configurations are the same as the game board 81 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 8, overlapping explanations will be given. Omit.

The speaker unit 26D may not move with the rotation of the front door frame 14 when the front door frame 14 is opened. In other words, the direction in which the sound of the speaker unit 26D is output when the front door frame 14 is opened should not be the direction facing the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the place where the speaker unit 26D is provided is not limited to the upper right portion of the game board 81, and may be provided in the upper left portion or the lower left portion of the game board 81. Even in this case, it is preferable to provide the game on the outside of the substantially circular game area 104 defined by the guide rail 103 so as not to interfere with the game. In addition, the speaker unit 26D may be provided on the front surface of the resin base 71 of the inner frame 13.

Further, since the speaker unit 26E is provided on the back surface side of the inner frame 13 (game board 81), when the inner frame 13 is opened, the speaker unit 26E moves with the rotation of the inner frame 13, but the sound of the speaker unit 26E is heard. The output direction is not the direction facing the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player who plays the game in the next seat. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player who plays the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. The place where the speaker portion 26E is provided is not limited to the upper right portion on the back surface side of the game board 81, and may be provided on the upper left portion or the lower left portion on the back surface side of the game board 81. Even in this case, it is preferable to provide it at a position that does not interfere with the back pack unit 15 or the like supported on the back surface of the game board 81.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device 400 and display control device 500>
FIG. 56 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes speaker units 26D and 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, and the speaker units 26D and 26E are provided. It is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. More specifically, the speaker units 26D and 26E are connected to the output port of the DAC 403d of the sound output LSI 403 provided with the voice emission control board 401. The DAC 403d converts the digital musical tone data or the digital synthetic musical tone data created by the sound data processing unit 403c into an analog signal, amplifies it, and then outputs it to the speaker units 26D and 26E.

FIG. 57 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26E included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), the DAC 403d is a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from a sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and three amplifier circuits that amplify the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. It includes a 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d, and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output. Is output to the speaker unit 26E.

In the example shown in FIG. 57 (a), the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment amplifies the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 57A, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D. The amplifier circuit 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, and the speaker unit 26E are provided with different amplifier circuits so that the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output to the speaker unit 26E. As shown in the example shown in FIG. 57 (b), the amplifier circuit included in the DAC 403d is used as one, the selector 403f is arranged after the amplifier circuit 403d2, and the output destination of the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2 is set to the speaker unit. It may be configured to switch to 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be further reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be further reduced.

In the present embodiment, the playback volume in the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker units 26D, and the speaker unit 26E of the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the processing data, in other words, the amplifier circuit. The parameter data that defines the amplification factor of the 403d2a, the amplifier circuit 403d2d, and the amplifier circuit 403d2e may be the same, and the speaker units 26D and 26E may be amplified in order to prevent the hall operator and employees from missing the abnormality notification. Parameter data may be specified so that the amplification factor of the circuits 403d2d and 403d2e is larger than the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2a of the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13 with a dedicated speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened, the front door frame 14 has been opened. At that time, the direction of the speaker unit 26D does not become the direction facing the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a dedicated speaker unit 26E for notifying that the inner frame 13 has been opened on the back surface side of the game board 81 attached to the inner frame 13, and when the inner frame 13 is opened. The speaker unit 26E does not face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, when notifying that the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 have been opened from the speaker units 26D and 26E, it is not necessary to reduce the playback volume of the dedicated speaker units 26D and 26E, and the player is abnormal. The risk of annoying the notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

<About the abnormality notification process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormality notification process of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The operation of the abnormality notification processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is substantially the same as the operation of the abnormality notification processing in the first embodiment, but there are some differences, so that the present embodiment is referred to with reference to FIG. 58. The operation of the abnormality notification processing of the pachinko machine 10 according to the above will be described.

When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2401 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2404. Further, when it is determined in step S2401 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2402. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2403, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, since the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in the state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed), the volume output from the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes small outside the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is preferable that the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the parameters are specified so that the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the parameters are specified so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes a predetermined value and the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e becomes zero so that becomes zero.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26D and 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E becomes zero. When muting, it may be an output short type circuit that shorts (connects to GND) the output of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e, or as an output open type circuit that cuts off the input to the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e by a selector or the like. May be good.

In addition, when the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker units 26D and 26E, as described above, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in the state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed), so that the speaker unit 26D , The volume output from 26E becomes smaller outside the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery may be increased. In this case, the amplification factor of the amplifier circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery becomes larger than the amplification factor of the amplification circuits 403d2d and 403d2e of the speaker units 26D and 26E in the abnormality notification at the normal time. The parameters may be specified as such.

In step S2404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2411, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2404 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2405. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2406, the MPU 402 determines whether the received normal time notification command is due to the opening of the front door frame 14. When the determination result in step S2406 is due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (YES), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal time notification for opening the front door frame in step S2407. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program for opening the front door frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, in the present embodiment, the parameters are specified so that when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. Specifically, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26D becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, 26E. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes zero so that the value becomes zero. Further, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26C, 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C, 26E becomes zero. When muting, an output short-type circuit may be used in which the outputs of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e are short-circuited (connected to the GND), or an output open that cuts the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 57B, when one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be the speaker unit 26D by the selector 403f.

If the determination result in step S2406 is not due to the opening of the front door frame 14 (NO), the MPU 402 starts reading the data for normal time notification for opening the inner frame in step S2408. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the normal time notification program for opening the inner frame, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, in the present embodiment, when the inner frame 13 is open, the parameters are specified so that the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. Specifically, the parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes a predetermined value so that the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26E becomes a predetermined value, while the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D is zero. The parameters are specified so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes zero so as to be. Further, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26A to 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26D becomes zero. When muting, an output short-type circuit may be used in which the outputs of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d are short-circuited (connected to the GND), or an output open that disconnects the inputs to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit. Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 57B, when one amplifier circuit is used, the output destination of the amplifier circuit 403d2 may be the speaker unit 26E by the selector 403f.

In step S2409, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2410, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2403, step S2407 or step S2408. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2403, step S2407 or step S2408, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is generated. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E. As a result, an abnormality is notified from the speaker units 26A to 26C, the speaker unit 26D, or the speaker unit 26E (for example, "the door was opened while the power was cut off!" Output of voice such as "Open!" And warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2403, step S2407, or step S2408. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2413. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the back pack unit opening command has been received in step S2411 (YES), the MPU 402 has the speaker unit 26D (when the front door frame 14 is opened) or in step S2412. A sound to reduce the playback volume of the abnormality notification (output of voice such as "Door is open!" And warning sound for normal notification) output from the speaker unit 26E (when the inner frame 13 is opened). Instruct the output LSI 403. The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S2413, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2411 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2414.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2413 that the door open notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door open notification release command to the display control device 500 in step S2414. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.
In step S2415, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker unit 26D or the speaker unit 26E based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" Normally, the output of voice such as "Door is open!" And warning sound) is stopped. Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2415, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads out the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2416, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2417, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2409. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2409, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2409, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2409, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. In this case, in step S2409, when the sound data whose reading is started in step S2403, step S2407 or S2408 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. May be processed. Further, in step S2409, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the playback is continued without stopping the BGM, the abnormality notification from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is performed in step S2415. The playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and when the playback of the BGM is restarted in step S2417, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to a predetermined value. You may try to raise it. By configuring in this way, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2411, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), the process of step S2412 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound or the like from the speaker unit D or the speaker unit 26E is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal benefits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In some cases, the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat or the maintenance worker is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent. In addition, the process of steps S2411 and S2412 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment includes a speaker unit 26D for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened, but the speaker unit 26D has a speaker for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened. Not only as a unit, but also as a speaker unit that is also used with the speaker unit 26A.
FIG. 59 is a front view of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the second embodiment. When the speaker unit 26D is used not only as a speaker unit for notifying that the front door frame 14 has been opened but also as a speaker unit also used as the speaker unit 26A, the front door frame 14 is closed (as shown in FIG. 59). When the door is closed), the sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26D can be heard by providing an opening 14c having a plurality of through holes in the area of the front door frame 14 (mesh portion in FIG. 59) at a position facing the speaker unit 26D. It is preferable to prevent it from being attenuated.

FIG. 60 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC and the speaker unit included in the sound output LSI of the gaming machine according to the modified example of the present embodiment.
In the modification of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 60, the DAC 403d amplifies the DAC circuit 403d1 that converts the digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal and the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. It is provided with three amplifier circuits 403d2a, an amplifier circuit 403d2d, and an amplifier circuit 403d2e. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26B and 26C, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2d is output to the speaker unit 26D, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2e is output. Is output to the speaker unit 26E.

Then, in the normal abnormality notification described with reference to FIG. 58, when the front door frame 14 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26D. Therefore, in the modified example of the present embodiment, amplification is performed. While the parameters of the program and processing data for executing the processing for abnormality notification stored in the ROM 412 are specified so that the amplification factor of the circuit 403d2d becomes a predetermined value, the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26E The parameters of the program and the processing data for executing the processing for abnormality notification stored in the ROM 412 so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e becomes zero so that the reproduction volume becomes zero are specified. ing.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26E may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26E becomes zero. When muting, an output short-type circuit may be used in which the outputs of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e are short-circuited (connected to the GND), or an output open that cuts the input to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2e by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit.

Further, in the normal abnormality notification described with reference to FIG. 58, when the inner frame 13 is open, the abnormality notification is performed from the speaker unit 26E. Therefore, in the modified example of the present embodiment, the amplifier circuit is used. While the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the parameters of the processing data are specified so that the amplification factor of the 403d2e becomes a predetermined value, the playback of the speaker units 26B, 26C, and 26D is specified. The parameters of the program and the processing data for executing the processing for abnormality notification stored in the ROM 412 so that the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d becomes zero so that the volume becomes zero are specified. There is.

The reproduction of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26D may be muted so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26B, 26C, 26D becomes zero. When muting, an output short-type circuit may be used in which the outputs of the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d are short-circuited (connected to the GND), or an output open that disconnects the inputs to the amplifier circuit 403d2a and the amplifier circuit 403d2d by a selector or the like. It may be a type circuit.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitting bodies of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be configured not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. The possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable to the fixed frame (outer frame 11) and a second frame body that is openable and closable to the first frame body. (Front door frame 14), the first sound device (speaker units 26D, 26E) provided in the first frame body, and a plurality of second sound devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the second frame body. When the detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290) for detecting the opening of the first and second frames and the detection device detects the opening of the first frame or the second frame. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) that controls the first sound device to notify an abnormality. That is, the first acoustic device is provided in the first frame body and does not rotate together with the second frame body to be opened. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound from the first sound device is not output to the player who plays the game in the adjacent seat. As a result, the risk that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) The detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290) of the pachinko machine 10 include a first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body (inner frame 13). A second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body (front door frame 14) is provided. Therefore, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening can be detected and an abnormality can be notified.

(3) The first frame body (inner frame 13) of the pachinko machine 10 has a game board (game board 81) through which the game ball flows down, and the first sound device (speaker units 26D, 26E) is the first frame. It is provided on the game board of the body (inner frame 13). Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement position (layout) of the first acoustic device is improved. Further, since it is attached to the game board, the first acoustic device can be easily attached.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, a cover member for attenuating the notification sound when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened is provided, and any one of a plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is provided by this cover member. By making the reproduction volume of one or more notification sounds lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices, the pachinko machine 10 that reduces the risk that the player playing the game in the next seat will be annoyed by the abnormal notification sound. Will be explained. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Approximate configuration of speaker and cover members included in the gaming machine>
FIG. 61 is a schematic configuration diagram of a speaker portion 26A and a cover member 27 included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state in which the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 (hereinafter, 61 (b) is a front view of a state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27 (hereinafter, also referred to as a second state), FIG. 61 (c) is a front view of the first state. 61 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment XX, and FIG. 61 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the line segment YY of FIG. 61 (b).

The cover member 27 is attached to the pachinko machine 10 and has a plate-shaped first member 27a (front member) facing the speaker portion 26A and a lower side to the back side (back side) of the first member 27a. A plate-shaped second member 27b (lower side surface member) extending in the direction and a plate-shaped extending in the direction from the upper side to the back surface side (back side) of the first member 27a and facing the second member 27b. 3rd member 27c (upper side member) and a plate extending in the direction from the left side side of the first member 27a to the back surface side (back side side) and connecting the second member 27b and the left side side of the third member 27c to each other. It is a box-shaped member that is composed of a fourth member 27d (left side member) and has an open right side. Further, the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is provided with a slide gear 27e that meshes with the drive gear 30a of the cover member drive unit 30, which will be described later.

Further, an origin projection 27f1 for the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27, and the maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. The protrusion 27f2 for the maximum point of the above is provided. Here, the origin detection sensor 28 is provided at the position of the origin projection 27f1 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the first state (origin position). Further, the maximum point detection sensor 29 is provided at the position of the maximum point projection 27f2 of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 when the cover member 27 is in the second state (maximum point position).

In the present embodiment, a rack-and-opinion method is adopted as a configuration for driving the cover member 27, and the cover member 27 is covered by the cover member 27 in the vicinity of the cover member 27, and the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27. A cover member driving unit 30 is provided for changing the first state (origin position) that is not set and the second state (maximum point position) in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27.
The cover member drive unit 30 includes a cover member drive motor (not shown) and a drive gear 30a which is a gear, and when the cover member drive motor is driven, it meshes with the slide gear 27e of the cover member 27. The drive gear 30a rotates to drive the cover member 27, and the position of the cover member 27 changes between the first state and the second state.

The cover member driving motor is, for example, a stepping motor, which is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown) to drive and rotate the drive gear 30a at a predetermined step angle. In addition, a DC motor with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. The drive mechanism of the cover member 27 can be configured at a lower cost than the stepping motor.

The slide gear 27e is formed by cutting the second member of the cover member 27 into teeth, and is tooth-engaged to the drive gear 30a so that the slide gear 27e can reciprocate in the left-right direction as the drive gear 30a rotates. .. Therefore, by driving and rotating the drive gear 30a in step units by the cover member driving motor, the slide gear 27e moves in the left-right direction in step units, and the cover member 27 is moved from the origin position to the maximum point. It can be driven within the range up to the position.

Further, on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14, two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 formed so as to project toward the front surface side are formed. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 are formed so as to be separated by a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the speaker portion 26A. The two rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 cooperate with the cover member 27 to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. Functions as. That is, in the first state in which the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is from the opening 14c provided on the front side of the front door frame 14 to the front door frame 14. It is radiated forward. On the other hand, in the second state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27, the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A is the front door frame by the guide path 14e formed by the cover member 27 and the rib portions 14b1 and 14b2. It is guided to the opening 14d formed on the right side surface of 14, and is radiated from the opening 14d of the front door frame 14 toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

<Outline configuration of origin detection sensor>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of an origin detection sensor.
Next, the configuration of the origin detection sensor 28 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of the origin detection sensor 28. Since the maximum point detection sensor 29 has the same configuration as the origin detection sensor 28, the description thereof will be omitted.

The origin detection sensor 28 includes a light emitting element mounting portion 28a to which a light emitting element (not shown) is attached, a light receiving element mounting portion 28b to which a light receiving element (not shown) is attached, and one end of the light emitting element mounting portion 28a. It is a U-shaped sensor composed of a connecting portion 28c that connects one end of the light receiving element mounting portion 28b so that the light emitting element and the light receiving element are arranged so as to face each other at a distance of a predetermined distance. The detection groove 28d is formed by the portion 28a, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b, and the connecting portion 28c.

When there is no insert (protrusion for origin 27f1) in the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is directly received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 28b. To. On the other hand, when an insert is inserted into the detection groove 28d, the light emitted from the light emitting element attached to the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is blocked, and the light received by the light receiving element attached to the light receiving element mounting portion 28b receives the light. Can not. The origin detection sensor 28 outputs an off signal when light is received by the light receiving element and an on signal when light is not received, so that in the voice emission control device 400 that receives the signal, something is formed in the detection groove 28d. It can be determined whether or not the insert has been inserted.

In this origin detection sensor 28, the light emitting element mounting portion 28a is arranged on the front side in front view, the light receiving element mounting portion 28b is arranged on the rear surface side in front view, the connecting portion 28c is arranged on the lower side in front view, and the cover member 27 is at the origin position. The origin projection 27f1 provided at the left end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27 is inserted into the detection groove 28d, so that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked. There is. Therefore, when the origin detection sensor 28 detects that the light radiated from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the origin detection sensor 28 outputs an on signal, so that the voice emission control device 400 can perform the voice emission control device 400. It can be determined that the cover member 27 has reached the origin position.

Further, the maximum point detection sensor 29 is arranged in the same direction as the origin detection sensor 28, the cover member 27 is at the maximum point position, and the maximum point protrusion provided at the right end of the second member 27b of the cover member 27. The 27f2 is attached so as to block the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element by being inserted into the detection groove of the maximum point detection sensor 29. Therefore, when the maximum point detection sensor 29 detects that the light emitted from the light emitting element to the light receiving element is blocked, the maximum point detection sensor 29 outputs an on signal to control the voice emission control device. The 400 can determine that the cover member 27 has reached the maximum point position.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device>
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes an origin detection sensor 28 and a maximum point detection sensor 29. The origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are connected to the input port of the voice emission control board 401, and the on signal output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29 is sent to the voice emission control board 401. Is entered. In the MPU 402, the cover member 27 is in the origin position, in other words, the speaker portion 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 (first state) by the on signal output from the origin detection sensor 28 and the maximum point detection sensor 29. It is determined whether the cover member 27 is in the maximum point position, in other words, the speaker portion 26A is in a state of being covered by the cover member 27 (second state).

Further, the cover member driving unit 30 is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The cover member drive unit 30 drives the cover member 27 between the origin position and the maximum point position based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the voice emission control board 401, and the speaker unit 26A The first state not covered by the cover member 27 and the second state in which the speaker portion 26A is covered by the cover member 27 are changed.

In this embodiment, in order to attenuate the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A by the cover member 27, unlike the first embodiment, a parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412. The value of is not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship with the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
FIG. 64 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 64, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C can be amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2 in order to attenuate the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A by the cover member 27. It is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the program. It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each speaker unit 26A to 26C that defines the reproduction volume of the processing data in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, any one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C ( In the present embodiment, the cover member 27 provided in or near the speaker portion 26A) changes from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output from the speaker unit 26A to the front is attenuated by the cover member 27 and becomes smaller. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Further, since the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 being played can be suppressed from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is reduced.

<About the abnormality notification process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormal time notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2501 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2504. Further, when it is determined in step S2501 that the MPU 402 has received the power recovery notification command (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2502. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2503, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in this abnormality notification at the time of power recovery, the MPU 402 performs abnormality notification without driving the cover member 27 from the origin position to the maximum point position. In other words, the MPU 402 performs abnormality notification in the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2510 described later. Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2504 that the command for normal notification is received (YES), in step S2505, the cover member driving unit 30 is controlled to move the position of the cover member 27 from the origin position. Drive to the maximum point position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member drive unit 30 to change from the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27 to the second state in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27. Let me. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

In step S2506, the MPU 402 transmits a normal time notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2507, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2508, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2509, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2503 or step S2507. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2503 or step S2507, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" During normal operation. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2503 or step S2507. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2510, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2510 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2512. When the MPU 402 determines that the back pack unit release command has been received in step S2510 (YES), the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal time notification) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2511. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2511 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Of the sections 26A to 26C, when a specific speaker section, for example, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, only the playback volume of the speaker section 26A that is closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S1610, when the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is controlled to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 has the back pack unit 15 released with the parameter defining the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. (In this case, a dedicated amplifier circuit is provided in the speaker unit 26A).

In step S2512, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2513.
Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2512 that the door opening notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 controls the cover member driving unit 30 in step S2513 to position the cover member 27. Is driven from the maximum point position to the origin position. In other words, the MPU 402 controls the cover member drive unit 30 to change from the second state in which the speaker unit 26A is covered by the cover member 27 to the first state in which the speaker unit 26A is not covered by the cover member 27. Let me. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2514, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2515, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2515, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads out the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2516, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2517, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2508. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2508, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2508, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2508, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. In this case, in step S2509, when the sound data read out in step S2503 or step S2507 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S2508, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2515. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2517, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2510, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command has been received (YES), the process of step S2511 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal benefits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the configuration is such that the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent. In addition, the process of steps S2510 and S2511 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side portion of the inner frame 13 with the left side portion of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 has the left side portion of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as a support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the speaker portion 26A is in the second state of being covered with the cover member 27 when notifying the abnormality that the door is open.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. In this case, the cover member 27, the cover member driving unit 30, the origin detection sensor 28, and the maximum point detection sensor 29 are provided in the vicinity of the speaker portion 26B, and the rib portions 14b1 and 14b2 constituting the guideway 14e are formed. The speaker unit 26B is configured to be in the second state covered with the cover member 27 when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. Further, in this case, the opening 14d is formed on the left side surface of the front door frame 14, and the notification sound is radiated from the left side surface of the front door frame 14.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in, either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B may be configured to be in the second state covered with the cover member 27.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the detector is oriented so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will open, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ears of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26A may be set as the second state covered with the cover member 27, and the alarm sound and the voice notifying the abnormality may be reproduced.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the detector opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26B may be set as the second state covered with the cover member 27, and the alarm sound and the voice notifying the abnormality may be reproduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the guide path 14e is formed on the right side of the speaker unit 26A, and the abnormal notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. The direction in which the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the 26A is emitted may be any direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14. For example, a guide path 14e is formed above the speaker portion 26A and is reproduced by the speaker portion 26A. The abnormality notification sound may be emitted toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, a taxiway 14e is formed on the left side of the speaker portion 26B, and the abnormal notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26B is the front door. The configuration may be such that the guide path 14e is radiated toward the left side of the frame 14, and the taxiway 14e is formed on the upper side of the speaker portion 26B, and the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker portion 26B is radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. It may be configured as a speaker.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitting bodies of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be configured not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. The possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of acoustic devices notify the abnormality. It has an abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403), a first state provided in one or more of a plurality of acoustic devices or in the vicinity thereof and not covering the acoustic device, and a second state of covering the acoustic device. It includes a cover member (cover member 27) and a driving means (cover member driving unit 30) that changes the cover member from the first state to the second state when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the acoustic device (speaker unit 26A) is attenuated by the cover member (cover member 27) and becomes smaller. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) When the pachinko machine 10 is in the second state of covering the acoustic device (speaker section 26A), the pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame) of an abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B, 26C). 13. It has a taxiway (14b) that guides the front door frame 14) in a direction other than the front. Therefore, when the cover member (cover member 27) is in the second state of covering the acoustic device, the abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device is directed to a direction other than the front of the frame by the taxiway, for example, the side of the pachinko machine 10. It is guided toward (side surface side), upward (top surface side), and downward (bottom surface side). Therefore, when the frame of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the right side portion or the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. The cover member (cover member 27) is an audio device (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B, 26C) or a sound device (speaker section 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side among a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C). It is provided in the vicinity. Therefore, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, on the side close to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is reduced by the cover member 27. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the direction of the speaker unit is changed to output from any one or more of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. The radiation direction of the reproduced sound is changed. A pachinko machine 10 will be described in which the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Approximate configuration of speaker and cover members included in the gaming machine>
FIG. 66 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67 is a partial cross-sectional view of the line segment ZZ of FIG. 66, and shows a schematic configuration diagram showing a speaker unit and its peripheral structure included in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 67A is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing a first state in which the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 67B shows the speaker unit 26A facing the pachinko machine 10 (front door). A partial cross-sectional plan view showing the process of changing from the front surface to the right side surface of the frame 14), FIG. 67 (c) shows the speaker unit 26A facing the right side surface of the pachinko machine 10 (front door frame 14). It is a partial cross-sectional plan view showing two states. As shown in FIG. 67, the speaker unit 26A includes a cone paper 26a and a cone paper vibration unit 26b, and is configured to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 26c by a speaker unit drive unit 26d.

In the case where the game is played without any abnormality or in the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery, as shown in FIG. 67A, the speaker portion 26A has the cone paper 26a in front of the front door frame 14 (front side). ) Is facing (first state), and BGM, sound effects, and abnormality notification (for example, "power supply") are transmitted through the opening 14c formed in the area on the front side of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A. The door was opened during the shutoff! ”, Etc.) is output toward the front (player) of the front door frame 14.

On the other hand, in the normal time abnormality notification, a command for normal time notification indicating that effect is output from the main control device 300 to the voice emission control device 400. The voice emission control device 400 outputs a signal for generating an abnormality notification to the speaker units 26A to 26C and outputs a drive signal to the speaker unit drive unit 26d based on the reception of the normal time notification command. The speaker unit 26A is rotated counterclockwise (CCW) about the rotation axis 26c, and is controlled so as to face the right side of the front door frame 14. As a result, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), the speaker unit 26A rotates counterclockwise about the rotation axis 26c, and finally, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the speaker unit 26A is rotated. It is in a state of being rotated by about 90 degrees, in other words, a state in which the speaker portion 26A faces the right side surface of the front door frame 14 (second state). In this state, the front door frame is constantly notified (for example, "the door is open while the power is cut off!") Through the opening 14d formed in the area on the right side surface of the front door frame 14 facing the speaker portion 26A. It is output toward the right side of 14 (the direction in which there is no player).

Here, the speaker unit drive unit 26d is configured by, for example, a stepping motor, is driven by a pulse signal applied from a driver (not shown), and drives and rotates the speaker unit 26A at a predetermined step angle. In addition, a DC motor with an encoder that detects the amount of rotation may be used instead of the stepping motor. The drive mechanism of the speaker unit 26A can be configured at a lower cost than the stepping motor.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is also formed so as to project to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 on the right side of the speaker portion 26A of the front door frame 14 as in the pachinko machine according to the third embodiment. Two rib portions may be formed, and a guide path may be provided to guide the reproduced sound output from the speaker portion 26A to the opening portion 14d formed on the right side surface of the front door frame 14. By providing the taxiway in this way, it is possible to reduce the component radiated to the front side of the front door frame 14 in the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A in the abnormality notification in the normal time.

<Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device>
FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the voice emission control device 400 and the display control device 500 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a speaker unit drive unit 26d that changes the direction of the speaker unit 26A. The speaker unit drive unit 26d is connected to the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The speaker unit drive unit 26d is in the first state and the front with the speaker unit 26A facing the front of the front door frame 14 based on the control signal from the MPU 402 input via the output port of the voice emission control board 401. The door frame 14 is changed from the second state facing other than the front.

In this embodiment, the speaker unit drive unit 26d changes the direction of the speaker unit 26A from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. Unlike the first embodiment, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

<Connection relationship with the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in order to change the radiation direction of the reproduced sound output from the speaker unit 26A by the speaker unit drive unit 26d, different amplifier circuits are prepared for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. You don't have to. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration as the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment described with reference to FIG. 64, and the DAC 403d is a digital input from the sound data processing unit. A DAC circuit 403d that converts a signal into an analog signal and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d are provided, and the analog signal amplified by the amplification circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C. To. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare different amplifier circuits for the speaker units 26A to 26C as in the first embodiment. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a, a program and processing for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412. It is not necessary to prepare parameter data for each speaker unit 26A to 26C that defines the playback volume of the data for each speaker unit 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is detected by the first and second monitoring devices 250 and 290, the speaker unit drive unit 26d among the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. From the first state in which any one or more of the above (speaker unit 26A in the present embodiment) faces the front of the front door frame 14, the second state in which the direction other than the front of the front door frame 14 (right side in the present embodiment) faces. Change to. Therefore, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player located in front of the frame body, in other words, the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

<About the abnormality notification process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormal time notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2604. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2601 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2602. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2603, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in the abnormality notification at the time of power restoration, the MPU 402 performs the abnormality notification without changing the orientation of the speaker unit 26A from the first state to the second state. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2604, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2604 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2610 described later. Further, when it is determined in step S2604 that the MPU 402 has received the normal time notification command (YES), in step S2605, the speaker unit drive unit 26d is controlled so that the direction of the speaker unit 26A is set to the front door frame. The first state facing the front of the 14 is changed to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14.

In step S2606, the MPU 402 transmits a normal time notification command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.
Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2607, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2608, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2609, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2603 or step S2607. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data whose reading was started in step S2603 or step S2607, and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is the speaker unit 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from ~ 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C notify the abnormality (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" During power recovery, and "The door is open!" During normal operation. And the output of the warning sound) is started. Further, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2603 or step S2607. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2610, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the back pack unit release command transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the back pack unit release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2610 that the back pack unit release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2612. When the MPU 402 determines that the back pack unit release command has been received in step S2610 (YES), the MPU 402 outputs an abnormality notification (normal time notification) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2611. Instruct the sound output LSI 403 to reduce the playback volume of the voice and warning sound such as "The door is open!" The sound output LSI 403 controls to reduce the reproduction volume such as abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

Here, the control for reducing the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification or the like output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in step S2611 may be controlled so as to reduce the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the speakers. Of the sections 26A to 26C, when a specific speaker section, for example, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, only the playback volume of the speaker section 26A that is closest to the ear of the player playing in the left adjacent seat is reduced. It may be controlled to. In step S2611, when controlling the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C to be reduced, the sound output LSI 403 opens the back pack unit 15 with a parameter that defines the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. By updating to the parameter of the case and reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker units 26A to 26C, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. When controlling to reduce only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A, the sound output LSI 403 reduces only the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A by reducing the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit of the speaker unit 26A. To control.

In step S2612, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2613.

Further, when the MPU 402 determines in step S2612 that the door open notification release command is received (YES), the MPU 402 controls the speaker unit drive unit 26d in step S2613 to control the front door frame 14. The direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed (returned) from the second state facing other than the front to the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14. As a result, the reproduced sound of the speaker unit 26A, that is, the abnormality notification is radiated toward the front of the front door frame 14.

In step S2614, the MPU 402 transmits a door opening notification release command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2615, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2615, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads out the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2617, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2618, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2608. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2608, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2608, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2608, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. In this case, in step S2609, when the sound data read out in step S2603 or step S2607 is reproduced (output), the reproduction volume of the voice or the warning sound is gradually or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may. Further, in step S2608, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2615. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2617, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

Further, in the above description, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command has been received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command has been received (YES), the process of step S2611 is executed. Therefore, the playback volume of the warning sound and the like is reduced. This is because the back pack unit 15 must open the back pack unit 15 after opening the inner frame 13, and it takes time to open the back pack unit 15, so that the inner frame 13 is opened. There is a high possibility that the back pack unit 15 will be opened for maintenance, etc., rather than the so-called goto act of gaining illegal benefits by malfunctioning the devices and parts arranged inside. Since it takes time to perform this, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has received the back pack unit release command, in other words, it is determined that the back pack unit 15 is open. In this case, the configuration is such that the warning sound and the like are reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent. In addition, the process of steps S2610 and S2611 may not be performed, in other words, it may be configured not to determine whether or not the back pack unit 15 is open (in this case, one-step control is performed). In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 with a back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side portion of the inner frame 13 with the left side portion of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 has the left side portion of the outer frame 11. It is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 as a support side. When opening the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 is opened so as to rotate forward (player side) with the support side as a rotation axis. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying an abnormality that the door is open, the speaker unit 26A faces the front of the front door frame 14 from the first state to the front of the front door frame 14. It is changing to the second state facing other than.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. In this case, the direction of the speaker unit 26B is configured to change from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in, the direction of the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B is changed from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the detector is oriented so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will be opened, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ear of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker unit 26A changes from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. Change.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the detector opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. Therefore, when notifying the abnormality that the door is open, the direction of the speaker unit 26B changes from the first state facing the front of the front door frame 14 to the second state facing other than the front of the front door frame 14. Change.

Further, in the present embodiment, by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26A to the right side surface of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is radiated toward the right side of the front door frame 14. However, the direction in which the abnormal notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A is emitted may be a direction other than the front surface of the front door frame 14, for example, the direction of the speaker unit 26A is changed to the upper side of the front door frame 14. By doing so, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26A may be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14. When the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the speaker unit 26B reproduces the sound by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26B to the left side surface of the front door frame 14. The abnormality notification sound may be radiated toward the left side of the front door frame 14, and by changing the direction of the speaker unit 26B to the upper side of the front door frame 14, the abnormality notification sound reproduced by the speaker unit 26B can be generated. It may be configured to be radiated toward the upper side of the front door frame 14.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitting bodies of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be configured not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. The possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of sound devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, a plurality of acoustic devices notify the abnormality. When the opening of the frame is detected by the abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) and the detection device, one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is oriented from the first state facing the front of the frame. It is provided with a driving means (speaker unit driving unit 26d) for changing to a second state facing other than the front of the frame body.
That is, when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the orientation of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices changes from the first state to the second state, and the player located in front of the frame. In other words, the abnormality notification sound is not output to the player who plays the game in the next seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

(2) When the sound device (speaker units 26A to 26C) is in the second state, the pachinko machine 10 provides a taxiway for guiding the abnormality notification sound output from the sound device in a direction other than the front of the frame. Be prepared. Therefore, when the acoustic device is in the second state, the abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device is in a direction other than the front of the frame by the taxiway, for example, the side (side surface side) and the upper side (upper surface side) of the gaming machine. ), It is guided downward (bottom side). Therefore, when the frame of the gaming machine is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is the fixed frame (outer frame 13) with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. It is supported by either the right side portion or the left side portion of the frame 11), and the driving means (speaker unit driving unit 26d) is arranged on a side of a plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) different from the supporting side. The direction of the sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker unit 26B, 26C) is changed. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the pachinko machine 10 reproduces one or more of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. By making the volume lower than the notification sound reproduction volume of other audio devices (in the first embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker unit 26A is reduced), the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. I try to reduce the risk of thinking. In the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. A pachinko machine 10 will be described in which the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Connection relationship with the DAC and speaker section of the sound output LSI>
In the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the first method is to gradually or gradually reduce the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C. Unlike the embodiment, the value of the parameter defining the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 is not different between the speaker unit 26A and the speaker units 26B and 26C. In other words, the values of the parameters that define the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit included in the DAC403d stored in the ROM 412 are the same in the speaker units 26A to 26C.

FIG. 70 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the connection relationship between the DAC 403d and the speaker units 26A to 26C included in the sound output LSI 403 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
In the example shown in FIG. 70, the DAC 403d includes a DAC circuit 403d1 that converts a digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal, and an amplifier circuit 403d2a that amplifies the analog signal converted by the DAC circuit 403d1. Here, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. Therefore, unlike the first embodiment, different amplifier circuits are not prepared for the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the number of expensive amplifier circuits (op amps) can be reduced, and the load of arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced because it is not necessary to control each of a plurality of amplifier circuits.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the analog signal output to the speaker units 26A to 26C is amplified by the common amplifier circuit 403d2a, the program for executing the abnormality notification process stored in the ROM 412 and the process. Parameter data that defines the reproduction volume of the processing data in the speaker units 26A to 26C is not prepared for each speaker unit 26A to 26C.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened, the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. Therefore, the abnormal notification sound output forward from the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. As a result, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. Further, since the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 being played can be suppressed from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the pachinko machine 10 are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is reduced.

<About the time change of the playback volume of the speaker section>
FIG. 71 is a conceptual diagram of the time change of the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As described above, the MPU 402 of the pachinko machine 10 gradually or gradually reduces the reproduction volume of the notification sounds of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying that the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 have been opened. It is controlled so that it becomes smaller. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71, the reproduction volume of the notification sound of the plurality of speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced at a constant rate (for example, by 1db) at predetermined time intervals T (for example, 5 sec).

The time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to 5 sec and is arbitrary. However, if the time interval T for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is too long, It is preferable that the length is not too long because the player sitting next to the seat may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. Further, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not set at time intervals, but the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced every time the sound of the abnormality notification (for example, "the door is open!") Is reproduced. You may do so.

<About the abnormality notification process executed by the voice emission control device 400>
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a flowchart of an abnormal time notification process. When an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes an abnormality notification process in order to notify the abnormality. Here, the abnormality notification processing when at least one of the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is opened by the monitoring devices 250 and 290 will be described, and the description of other abnormal notifications will be omitted.

In step S2701, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the power recovery notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2701 that the power recovery notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2705. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2701 that the power recovery notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the power recovery notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2702. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received command for notification at the time of power recovery.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 sets a data table for executing the power recovery notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from various data storage areas of. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the power recovery notification display based on the power recovery notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2703, the MPU 402 starts reading data for power recovery notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for power recovery notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the abnormality notification at the time of power recovery is performed in a state where the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are closed (closed). That is, since the front door frame 14 is not in a state of being opened so as to face the right side or the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the adjacent seat, there is little possibility that the player playing in the adjacent seat feels annoyed with the abnormality notification. Therefore, in this program for notifying at the time of power recovery and the processing data, processing is performed to gradually or gradually reduce the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C when notifying the abnormality that the door is open. do not have.

In step S2704, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) and emitting light of the sound data whose reading was started in step S2703. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2703 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it can be output. As a result, abnormality notification (for example, output of a voice such as "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" And a warning sound) is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 causes the error display lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2703.

In step S2705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not it has received the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 302. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the normal time notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S2712, which will be described later. If the MPU 402 determines in step S2705 that the normal time notification command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the normal time notification command to the display control device 500 in step S2706. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is performed based on the received normal notification command.

Specifically, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 has various data tables for executing the normal time notification display on the symbol display device 91 based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 in the program ROM 512. Read from the data storage area. Then, the MPU 502 outputs a command to the VDP 505 based on this data table every time the predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 91 executes the normal time notification display based on the normal time notification command transmitted from the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400.

In step S2707, the MPU 402 starts reading data for normal time notification. Specifically, the MPU 402 starts reading the program for normal time notification, processing data, light emission data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM. Here, the light emission data is defined so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B included in the pachinko machine 10 do not emit light. In other words, the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off. Therefore, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped at the time of normal notification.

In step S2708, the MPU 402 performs a stop process of BGM (including music and sound for directing). In this BGM stop process, a process of stopping or muting the BGM being output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed. When the BGM is stopped, the MPU 402 stores the address of the data at which the BGM reproduction is stopped in the RAM 413 in order to restart the BGM reproduction when the door opening notification is released. When resuming BGM playback when the door open notification is released, the MPU 402 reads the address stored in RAM 413 and starts BGM playback from that address to resume playback from the position where BGM was stopped. Can be done.
Further, when the BGM is muted, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to mute the BGM so that the sound is not output without stopping the reproduction of the BGM itself. The sound output LSI 403 reproduces the BGM based on the instruction of the MPU 402, but mutes the reproduced sound of the BGM so that the sound is not output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2709, the MPU 402 sets a counter to measure the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the number of times to reduce the reproduction volume in the counters provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413. For example, when "4" is set in the counter, the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced in five steps. The value set in this counter is decremented by 1 each time a predetermined time described with reference to FIG. 73 elapses, and when the value becomes zero, the process of reducing the playback volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is stopped. ..

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced, but if the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes too small, the abnormality notification becomes meaningless. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by setting the counter in step S2709, the number of times the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is reduced is set, and the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C becomes too small, which is abnormal. It prevents the notification from becoming meaningless. Although the value of the counter set in step S2709 is not limited, it is preferable that the value is set so that the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C does not become too small.

In step S2710, the MPU 402 performs sound data reproduction processing. In the sound data reproduction process of step S2710, the MPU 402 controls so that the volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26A to 26C is gradually or gradually reduced. The details of the sound data reproduction process in step S2710 will be described with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

In step S2711, the MPU 402 causes the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error indicator lamp unit 24 to emit light based on the program, the processing data, and the light emission data that started reading in step S2707. Here, in the light emission data for normal time notification, since the light emission data is specified so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are turned off, the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is stopped.

In step S2712, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the door opening notification release command for canceling the door opening notification transmitted from the MPU 302 has been received. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the flag corresponding to the door open notification release command of the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 is stored. When the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that the door open notification release command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process without executing the processes after step S2713.

If the MPU 402 determines in step S2712 that the door open notification release command has been received (YES), the MPU 402 transmits the door open notification release command to the display control device 500 in step S2713. In the display control device 500, the notification display on the symbol display device 91 is canceled based on the received door opening notification release command, and the normal state is restored.

In step S2714, the MPU 402 is notified of an abnormality from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the door open notification release command (for example, "The door was opened while the power was cut off!" If so, stop the output of voice such as "The door is open!" And a warning sound). Further, the MPU 402 stops the light emission of the error display lamp unit 24 based on the door open notification release command.
Further, in step S2714, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to read and reproduce the voice data "door closed!" Stored in the common ROM 404. The sound output LSI 403 reads the voice data "door closed!" From the common ROM 404 and reproduces it. As a result, the voice of "The door is closed!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2715, the MPU 402 clears the flags corresponding to the power recovery notification command and the normal notification command in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413 based on the door open notification release command, in other words, sets the flag value to 0. .. In step S2716, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to restart the reproduction of the BGM stopped or muted in step S2708. The sound output LSI 403 resumes the reproduction of the BGM based on the instruction from the MPU 402. Here, when the BGM was stopped in step S2708, the MPU 402 stopped the BGM by reading the address stored in the RAM 413 and instructing the sound output LSI 403 to restart the BGM reproduction from the address. Playback resumes from the position. If the BGM has been muted in step S2708, the MPU 402 instructs the sound output LSI 403 to unmute the BGM. The mute of the BGM is released to the sound output LSI 403, and the BGM is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. After that, the MPU 402 ends the abnormality notification process.

In the above description, in step S2708, the process of stopping or muting the BGM (including music and sound for directing) is performed, but the BGM is not stopped and the reproduction is continued in a gradual or stepwise manner. It is also possible to perform a process of lowering the playback volume to a predetermined value. Further, in step S2708, when the process of gradually or gradually lowering the volume is performed in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM, the reproduction of the abnormality notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C is performed in step S2714. The volume is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until the volume becomes zero or substantially zero, and in step S2716, when the playback of the BGM is restarted, the playback volume of the BGM is gradually reduced or gradually increased to a predetermined value. You may do so. By configuring in this way, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound. In addition, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a configuration in which the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C gradually or gradually decreases with the passage of time, as will be described with reference to FIG. 73 described later. .. Therefore, it is not determined whether or not the back pack unit release command has been received. In this case, it is not necessary to provide the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment with the back pack unit open detector 289 that detects the opening of the back pack unit 15. In this embodiment as well, as in the other embodiments, it is determined whether or not the back pack unit release command is received, and if it is determined that the back pack unit release command is received (YES), a warning is given. It may be configured to reduce the reproduction volume of sound or the like (two-step control). This further reduces the risk that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound during maintenance that requires time. It is not preferable to completely stop the output of the warning sound or the like because it is possible that the back pack unit 15 is not opened for maintenance or the like and is fraudulent.

<About the sound data reproduction process executed by the audio emission control device 400>
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the sound data reproduction process (process of step S2710) of FIG. 72.
In step S2801, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter to measure the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets "2500" as a time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C in the timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec. Therefore, the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is 5 sec. The time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is not limited to this, and is arbitrary. However, if the time interval for reducing the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C is too long, the next seat It is preferable not to make it too long because the sitting player may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound.

In step S2802, the MPU 402 starts reproducing (outputting) the sound data whose reading was started in step S2707 of FIG. 72. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the sequence data and parameter data of the program and processing data started to be read in step S2707 and the sound data in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound data is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it can be output. As a result, abnormality notification (for example, output of a voice such as "the door is open!" And a warning sound) is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S2803, the MPU 402 subtracts 1 from the value of the counter set in step S2708 of FIG. 72. For example, if the value of the counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to 4 in step S2708 of FIG. 72, the MPU 402 sets the value of the counter provided in the various counter areas of the RAM 413 to 3. Update to.

In step S2804, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter set in step S2801 is zero. If the value of the timer counter is not zero (NO) in step S2804, the MPU 402 ends the sound data reproduction processing without performing the subsequent processing. When the value of the timer counter is zero in step S2804 (YES), the MPU 402 reduces the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C. More specifically, the MPU 402 changes the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a to reduce the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C (step S2805).

In step S2806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the value of the counter set in step S2709 of FIG. 72 is zero. If the value of the counter is not zero (NO) in step S2806, the MPU 402 ends the sound data reproduction processing without performing the subsequent processing. When the value of the counter is zero in step S2806 (YES), the MPU 402 prevents the reproduction volume of the speaker units 26A to 26C from becoming lower than this. More specifically, in the MPU 402, the value of the parameter that defines the amplification factor of the amplifier circuit 403d2a is fixed in the subsequent processing.

[Other Examples of Fifth Embodiment]
In the above description, the reproduction volume of all the speaker units 26A to 26C provided in the pachinko machine 10 is gradually or gradually reduced, but the volume output (reproduced) from each of the speaker units 26A to 26C. The size of the speaker may be configured to be independently controllable. In other words, like the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shown in FIG. 38, the DAC 403d is converted by the DAC circuit 403d1 that converts the digital signal input from the sound data processing unit into an analog signal and the DAC circuit 403d1. The amplifier circuits 403d2a to 403d2c for amplifying the analog signal are provided, the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2a is output to the speaker unit 26A, and the analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2b is output to the speaker unit 26B. The analog signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 403d2c may be configured to be output to the speaker unit 26C.
In this case, in the audio data reproduction process (process of step S2710 in FIG. 72) described with reference to FIG. 73, only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a that outputs an analog signal to the speaker unit 26A is set every predetermined time or a predetermined number of notifications. It is controlled so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A is gradually or gradually reduced by changing each time.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the front door frame 14 is supported on the left side of the inner frame 13 with the left side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the left side of the outer frame 11. Since the portion is supported on the left side of the outer frame 11 with the portion as the support side, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, the support side is used as the rotation axis and the front side (player side). ) To rotate and open. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened, the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat, and the speaker unit 26A of the player playing in the left adjacent seat Closest to the ear. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the volume of the volume output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C can be independently controlled as described above, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured to be independently controllable. Only the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2a that outputs an analog signal to the speaker unit 26A is changed every predetermined time or every predetermined number of notifications, and the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A gradually decreases or gradually decreases. It should be controlled as such.

However, the front door frame 14 is supported on the right side of the inner frame 13 with the right side of the inner frame 13 as the support side, and the inner frame 13 is on the right side of the outer frame 11 with the right side of the outer frame 11 as the support side. If it is supported, in other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened to the opposite side, they should be opened so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. In this case, the volume parameter of the amplifier circuit 403d2b that outputs an analog signal to the speaker units 26B and 26C is changed every predetermined time or every predetermined number of notifications, and the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker units 26B is stepwise. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the size gradually decreases.

Further, the front door frame 14 is supported on both side portions of the inner frame 13 with the right side portion and the left side portion (hereinafter, also referred to as both side portions) of the inner frame 13 as support sides, and the inner frame 13 is supported on both side portions of the outer frame 11. In other words, when the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 of the pachinko machine 10 have a double door structure, the opening of the front door frame 14 is detected. In addition to the first monitoring device 250 and the second monitoring device 290 that detects the opening of the inner frame 13, a detector that detects to which side the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 are opened is provided. Based on the detection result in, the control may be performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from either the speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B is gradually or gradually reduced.

More specifically, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the left side as the support side, the detector is oriented so as to face the right side of the upper body of the player playing in the left adjacent seat. It will open, and the speaker unit 26A will be closest to the ears of the player playing in the left seat. Therefore, control is performed so that the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26A when notifying the abnormality that the door is open is gradually or gradually reduced.
Further, when the detector detects that the front door frame 14 or the inner frame 13 is opened with the right side as the support side, the detector opens so as to face the left side of the upper body of the player playing in the right adjacent seat. , The speaker unit 26B is closest to the ear of the player playing in the seat next to the right. Therefore, when an abnormality indicating that the door is open is notified, the reproduction volume of the abnormality notification output from the speaker unit 26B may be controlled so as to be gradually or gradually reduced.

In this embodiment, by using different light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process, the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is opened in the normal time notification process. Although the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B are configured not to emit light, the indicator lamp device 23A is used in the normal time notification process while using the same light emission data in the power recovery notification process and the normal time notification process. , 23B may be configured to stop the supply of light emitting power to the light emitting bodies of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B so that the light is not emitted. In this case, since it is not necessary to store and retain different light emission data between the power recovery notification process and the normal light emission processing, it is possible to reduce the capacity for storing the light emission data.

Further, when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened, one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B, preferably, the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is used. It may be configured not to emit light. Also in this case, the light emission data of the normal time notification process may be specified so that the indicator lamp device on the open side of the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 does not emit light, or the inner frame 13 or the front door may be specified. The supply of the light emitting power to the light emitting body of the indicator lamp device on the open side of the frame 14 may be stopped. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B do not emit light when notifying that the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 has been opened in the normal time notification process. The possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 has a frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to a fixed frame (outer frame 11), and a plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units) provided on the frame body. 26A to 26C), a detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detects the opening of the frame, and when the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the plurality of acoustic devices are controlled. It is provided with an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) for notifying an abnormality. The abnormality notifying means gradually or gradually reduces the volume of the plurality of acoustic devices when notifying the abnormality. That is, the notification is performed at a loud volume at first, but the volume is gradually or gradually reduced, so that the player sitting next to the seat effectively reduces the risk of annoying the abnormal notification sound, and the hall operator. It is possible to reduce the risk that employees will miss the abnormality notification.

(2) The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) of the pachinko machine 10 makes the volume of any one or more of the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) stepwise than the volume of the other audio devices. Or gradually reduce it. That is, when notifying an abnormality, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of audio devices is reduced, but the volume output from the other audio devices is not reduced, so that the music or voice output from the gaming machine is used. It is possible to reduce the risk that the player will be excited by the loss of the exhilaration and immersive feeling that occurs, and more effectively reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification.

(3) The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) of the pachinko machine 10 is supported by one of the right side portion or the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side. The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is a sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side among a plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C). The volume is made smaller stepwise or gradually lower than the volume of another audio device (speaker unit 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) (including an embodiment in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero). Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress the difficulty of hearing the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the music data (BGM) and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are individually stored in the common ROM 404 of the voice emission control device 400, and the music used in the effects MA to MC. Separately from the data (BGM) A to C, the voice data A to C of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are read out and output respectively. However, as explained with reference to FIG. 49, the sounds of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are heard during the output of the intro part of the music used in the productions MA to MC. Each is output. Therefore, the intro portion of the music data A to C may include the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. In the present embodiment, the present embodiment in which the intro portion of the music data A to C includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively, will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

<Production data>
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing music data stored in the common ROM 404. In the present embodiment, as described above, the intro portion of each music data A to C includes voice data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush", respectively. If you include a voice such as "Please hit right" in the intro part of the music, if you want to perform so-called loop processing, which is to return to the beginning and restart the output of the music after the music playback ends, "Right hit" A voice such as "Please" is output even during a loop (during the second and subsequent playbacks). Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is preferable not to include the intro portion in the loop processing.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the music data used in each of the effects MA to MC are divided into an intro portion and other loop portions. It is stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404. More specifically, the music data A to C exclude the sequence data, parameter data and sound data corresponding to the music data of only the intro part including the voice data such as "Please hit right", and the intro part. The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data after the A-melody portion are divided and stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404.

Then, for example, when the music data A used in the production MA is looped, the MPU 402 reproduces the music data of the intro portion and then continuously reproduces the music data of the loop portion at the time of outputting the music for the first time, and loops. When the music data of the part is completed, a process of outputting the music data of the loop part again (hereinafter, also referred to as a loop process) is performed. By performing the same processing as above for the music data B and C used in the production MB and MC, the voice such as "Please hit right" is played for the second time or later (loop) during the loop processing. It is prevented from being output even during processing).

The voice of "A RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data A is set so that the output of the voice of "A RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data A ends. ing. Further, the voice of "B RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data B is set so that the output of the voice of "B RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output of the intro part of the music data B ends. ing. Further, the voice of "C RUSH rush" included in the intro part of the music data C is set so that the output of the voice of "C RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part of the music data C. ing.

Further, according to the data table stored in the ROM 412, the music data A is associated with the effect MA, the music data B is associated with the effect MB, and the music data C is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 outputs the sound so as to read the music data A and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It controls the LSI 403. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MB, the MPU 402 reads the music data B and outputs the sound output LSI 403 from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads the music data C and outputs it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control. More specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 based on the program and processing data stored in the ROM 412, and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. .. The sound output LSI 403 outputs (reproduces) music data A to C from the speaker units 26A to 26C based on the data set in the register 403b.

Further, the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 store sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D and E. The MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data stored in the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 as necessary and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data D and E are speakers. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output (reproduced) from the units 26A to 26C. Here, the voice data D is the voice of "right-handed" and the voice data E is the voice of "please right-handed". Here, the audio data D is associated with the effect MA, and the audio data E is associated with the effect MC. Therefore, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MA, the MPU 402 outputs sound so as to read the audio data D and output it from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It controls the LSI 403. Further, when the effect type set in step S1706 or S1708 of the effect type selection process of FIG. 47 is the effect MC, the MPU 402 reads the audio data E and outputs the sound output LSI 403 from the speaker units 26A to 26C. To control.

<Transition process to production MA>
Next, the transition process to the effect MA in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MA of the present embodiment.
In step S2901, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S2903 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S2902, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data A from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data A is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it can be output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data A is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the intro part of the music data A includes the voice data of "A RUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW1) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data A, the voice "ARUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data A.

In step S2903, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S2901. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S2904. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data D "right-handed" from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the voice data D is set. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data D "right-handed" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If it is not determined in step S2903 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S2905, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MA. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data A stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data A from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

In step S2906, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data A has ended, and if the output of the music data A has ended, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion of the music data A (excluding the intro portion). The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the loop portion of the music data A is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Controls the output LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data A when the output of the music data A is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S2903 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MB>
Next, the transition process to the effect MB in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MB of the present embodiment.
In step S3001, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3003 described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3002, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data B from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data B is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it can be output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data B is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the intro part of the music data B includes the voice data of "BRUSH rush". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW2) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data B, the voice "BRUSH rush" is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data B.

In step S3003, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3001. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the right-handed navigation for RUSH in step S3004. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. .. If it is not determined in step S3003 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S3005, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MB. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data B stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data B from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

In step S3006, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data B has been completed, and if the output of the music data B has been completed, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion of the music data B (excluding the intro portion). The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the loop portion of the music data B is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Controls the output LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data B when the output of the music data B is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3003 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Transition process to production MC>
Next, the transition process to the effect MC in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the effect MC of the present embodiment.
In step S3101, the MPU 402 sets timer counters provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3103, which will be described later. Specifically, the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the ending period TE is set to "10 sec", the MPU 402 sets the timer counter to "5000" as the waiting time (waiting period) of the ending period TE. The value set in this timer counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3102, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data C from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data C is transmitted from the speaker units 26A to 26C. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that it can be output. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data C is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the intro part of the music data C includes the voice data of "C RUSH rush" and "Please hit right". Therefore, after a predetermined time (TW3) has elapsed from the start of output of the intro portion of the music data C, the voice "C RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C in accordance with the intro portion of the music data C, and the voice "C RUSH rush". After the output of "," the voice of "Please hit right" is output (played).

In step S3103, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period has ended based on the value of the timer counter set in step S3101. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 starts the hitting navigation in step S3104. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data D stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data D from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started. ..

In step S3105, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect of the effect MC. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the video data C stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data C from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505. If it is not determined in step S3103 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process.

In step S3106, the MPU 402 performs loop processing. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the music data C has ended, and if the output of the music data C has ended, the MPU 402 corresponds to the loop portion of the music data C (excluding the intro portion). The sequence data, parameter data, and sound data to be output are read from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound is output so that the loop portion of the music data C is output (reproduced) from the speaker units 26A to 26C. It controls the LSI 403. Further, the MPU 402 does not read the loop portion of the music data C when the output of the music data C is not completed.

The configuration for measuring the time in step 3103 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 includes the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" in the intro portion of the music data (BGM) A to C, respectively. Therefore, it is not necessary to store the music data and the voice data of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) individually in the storage means (ROM412 and the common ROM404), and also "A RUSH rush" and "B RUSH rush". , It is not necessary to measure the time in order to take the timing to output the voice of "CRUSH rush". Therefore, the storage capacity of the storage means (ROM412 and the common ROM 404) can be saved. In addition, the arithmetic processing of the MPU 402 can be reduced. Further, the player can recognize the gaming state by the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" included in the first data. Therefore, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the expectation for the game can be improved. In addition, the data in the intro part that includes the audio data of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" is not played repeatedly, and the data after the verse excluding the intro part is repeated. Since the data is reproduced, the voices of "A RUSH rush", "B RUSH rush", and "C RUSH rush" are repeatedly played back, and the player does not feel annoyed. Other effects are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

In the first and sixth embodiments, the transition process to each effect MA to MC has been described assuming that the effect types of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) are three types of effect MA, MB, and MC. The type of effect of the fourth mode M4 is not limited to the above three types, and may be any, two types, or four or more types.

Further, in the first and sixth embodiments, the embodiment in which the intro portion of the music is reproduced at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode) is described, but the application of the present invention is the fourth mode M4. It can be applied not only at the time of transition to, but also for all mode transitions that involve changes in music.

[7th Embodiment]
The first and sixth embodiments are the first and sixth embodiments in which the MPU 402, the sound output LSI 403, and the common ROM 404 are mounted on the voice emission control board 401 of the voice emission control device 400. In the first and sixth embodiments, the MPU 402 determines the content of the effect for a predetermined period based on the command received from the main control device 300, and performs light emission control to the various lamp units according to the content. It has a function. Further, the MPU 402 gives a sound output instruction to the sound output LSI 403 according to the content of the determined effect, and causes the sound output LSI 403 to control the sound output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, an embodiment in which a sound / light SOC (System On a Chip) 620 and a sound / light ROM 610 are provided on a voice emission control board 401 will be described. The SOC620 for sound and light includes a control core 621 that determines the execution content of the effect according to the command received from the main control device and controls the light emission of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 according to the determined effect content. , The sound output core 622 that controls the sound output of the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the effect content determined by the control core 621, and the address data and address data transmitted from the data transfer unit (DMA: Direct Memory Access) 621c of the control core 621. It has a built-in memory controller 624 that reads data from the sound / light ROM 610 according to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622. In this case, the sound output core 622 has priority over the control core 621 when reading data.

<Electrical configuration related to production control>
Hereinafter, an electrical configuration for controlling the execution of the effect of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 78. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

A voice emission control device 400 is provided as a control device for controlling the execution of the effect based on the instruction from the main control device 300. As shown in FIG. 78, the voice emission control device 400 includes a voice emission control board 401 on which a SOC 620 for sound light, a ROM 610 for sound light, and an amplifier circuit 630 are mounted. The sound / light SOC 620 includes a control core 621, a sound output core 622, a sound data processing unit 625, and a memory controller 624, and the sound / light SOC 620 is configured by integrating each of these elements into one chip.

The control core 621 determines the specific content of the effect based on the command received from the main control device 300, and executes the light emission control of the display lamp devices 23A and 23B and the error display lamp unit 24 according to the determined content. Further, the control core 621 sets data according to the content of the determined effect to the register 622a provided in the sound output core 622, and issues a command according to the content of the determined effect to the display control device 500. Send to. As a result, the sound output core 622 executes the sound output control in the manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 621, and the display control device 500 performs the display control in the manner in accordance with the contents instructed by the control core 621. Execute. Incidentally, the data setting for the register 622a of the sound output core 622 by the control core 621 is performed through the data bus SL that electrically connects the control core 621 and the sound output core 622 in the sound / light SOC 620. The control core 621 and the sound output core 622 can be bidirectionally communicated with each other through the data bus SL, and the data is set from the control core 621 to the sound output core 622 as described above, and the sound output core is set. A signal indicating that sound output is being performed is transmitted from 622 to the control core 621.

The control core 621 is used for reading program data and control data stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610 in addition to the CPU 621a, which is a central processing unit including a control unit and a calculation unit, and executes a program. A RAM 621b for temporarily storing necessary data is built in. The RAM 621b is configured to use a memory (that is, a volatile storage means) that requires external power supply for storage retention such as SRAM and DRAM for both reading and writing, and is capable of random access and is the same. When compared in terms of the data capacity of the above, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 610. The data capacity of the RAM 621b has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 4 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 610. However, the data capacity of the RAM 621b is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as it can be suitably controlled by the control core 621.

Further, the control core 621 also has a built-in data transfer unit 621c that gives an instruction to read data from the sound / light ROM 610 to the memory controller 624 based on the instruction from the CPU 621a. When the data corresponding to the data read instruction is written to the internal register of the data transfer unit 621c by the CPU 621a, the data transfer unit 621c tells the memory controller 624 until all the data corresponding to the read instruction is read to the RAM 621b. And sends the address data for data read instruction. The transmission of the address data is performed in synchronization with the clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit built in the data transfer unit 621c (for example, 4 MHz).

The sound output core 622 executes the sound output control of the speaker units 26A to 26C according to the content of the effect determined in the control core 621. The sound output core 622 contains a register 622a, an HWD622b, an SCM622d, and a data transfer unit 622c.

The register 622a has a function as a storage means for temporarily storing various data used in the sound output core 622, and can be used for both reading and writing a memory that requires external power supply for storage retention. It is configured to be used. In addition, random access is possible, and when compared with the same data capacity, the time required for reading is faster than that of the sound / light ROM 610. The register 622a has a data capacity of a large number of bytes so that a plurality of data can be stored and held at the same time, and has a data capacity of a unit of kilobytes or megabytes. Specifically, it has a data capacity of about 2 megabytes. The data capacity is smaller than the data capacity of the sound / light ROM 610 and smaller than the data capacity of the RAM 621b of the control core 621. However, the data capacity of the register 622a is not limited to this, and is arbitrary as long as it can be suitably controlled in the sound output core 622.

The HWD622b and SCM622d have a function of creating digital musical tone data by using the sound data transmitted from the control core 621 and stored in the register 622a and read from the sound / light ROM 610 according to the sequence data and the parameter data. The sequence data includes time data indicating the output start timing and output order of a series of sounds, and the parameter data includes data that determines the pitch, volume, timbre, etc. of the sound at a predetermined timing. There is. These sequence data and parameter data are set as a pair of data corresponding to each other, and a series of sound output is possible by using these pair of sequence data and parameter data. Further, the period of sound output defined by one set of sequence data and parameter data is constant at a specific time regardless of the type of sequence data and parameter data, for example, one game round or one open / close execution. It is 2.1 sec, which is shorter than the mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be shorter or longer than 2.1 sec. Further, the configuration may be a series of melody components, and in this case, the period of sound output determined by the sequence data and the parameter data varies depending on the type of the data.

The HWD622b creates digital musical tone data in order to reproduce pre-sampled recording data, and by creating sinusoidal data using the HWD recording data stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. , Enables playback of recorded data. The recorded data may be compressed data such as MP3 or uncompressed data. The SCM622d does not create digital music data from recorded data for a predetermined time, but creates digital music data by combining square wave data stored in advance in the sound light ROM 610 in chronological order, thereby creating electronic music data. It enables reproduction of sound (so-called pico-pico sound).

Here, the configuration of the register 622a used for creating digital musical tone data in HWD622b and SCM622d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 79. The register 622a is provided with a sequence area 711, a parameter area 712, an HWD area 713, and an SCM area 714. The sequence data already described is written in the sequence area 711, and the parameter data already described is written in the parameter area 712.

The HWD622b reads the recorded data stored in the sound / light ROM 610 into the HWD area 713 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712, and records the recording data. By creating digital musical tone data from the data, it is possible to output the recorded sound. The HWD area 713 is provided with the first CH area 713a to the 16th CH area 713p, and it is possible to create digital musical tone data based on different recording data in each CH area 713a to 713p. This makes it possible to simultaneously output sounds corresponding to a plurality of different recording data.

The SCM622d reads the square wave data stored in the sound / light ROM 610 into the SCM area 714 by referring to the sequence data written in the sequence area 711 and the parameter data written in the parameter area 712, and the square wave data thereof is read out to the SCM area 714. Electronic sound can be output by creating digital music sound data from wave data. The SCM area 714 is provided with a first CH area 714a to a 16th CH area 714p, and different digital musical tone data can be created in each CH area 714a to 714p. This makes it possible to output a plurality of different electronic sounds at the same time.

The 1st CH area 713a to 16th CH area 713p of the HWD area 713 and the 1st CH area 714a to 16th CH area 714p of the SCM area 714 each have an area that can store two created digital musical tone data. It is provided, and while sound output control is being performed using digital musical tone data created in one of the memorable areas, digital corresponding to the next execution period with respect to the execution period of the sound output control. Musical tone data is created in the other memorable area. As a result, it is possible to continuously create the digital musical tone data required for the next sound output control execution period while outputting the sound, and it is possible to continuously output the sound.

Returning to the description of FIG. 78, the sound data processing unit 973 of the SOC620 for sound and light has a function as a digital / analog converter, and the digital music data and the SCM area created in the HWD area 713 of the register 622a. The digital music sound data created in 714 is converted into an analog sound signal and output to the amplifier circuit 630 formed on the display control board 501. The amplifier circuit 630 amplifies the output level of the analog sound signal to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume, and outputs the amplified sound signal to the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the digital musical tone data is simultaneously created in the plurality of CH areas 713a to 713p in the HWD area 713, the sound data processing unit 973 synthesizes the digital musical tone data and also in the SCM area 714. When digital musical tone data is simultaneously created in a plurality of CH areas 714a to 714p, the digital musical tone data are combined. If digital musical tone data is created in each of the HWD area 713 and the SCM area 714, the digital musical tone data are combined. When the synthesis is performed in this way, the digitally synthesized musical tone data after the synthesis is converted into an analog sound signal, amplified by the amplifier circuit 630 as described above, and then output to the speaker units 26A to 26C. This makes it possible to simultaneously output a plurality of different sounds from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

As described above, when the sound is output, the sound data, which is either the recorded data or the rectangular wave data, is read from the sound / light ROM 610 to the register 622a, but the sound data is read out to the sequence area 711 of the register 622a. It is performed by the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622 based on the stored sequence data.

More specifically, the sequence data SD is defined with pointer data set in accordance with the processing timing of the sound output core 622, which is specifically described by using the explanatory diagram of FIG. 80 showing an example of the sequence data. , The content data of the sound output and the content data of the data transfer are defined corresponding to each pointer data. The processing timing of the sound output core 622 is generated in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from a clock circuit (not shown) built in the sound output core 622. In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 622c, and specifically, it is 10 MHz. When the processing timing of the sound output core 622 comes, each of the HWD622b, the SCM622d, and the data transfer unit 622c performs an operation corresponding to the sequence data and the parameter data.

The content data of the sound output in the sequence data SD is used in HWD622b and SCM622d to create digital musical tone data for each channel. In this case, the content data of the sound output is set corresponding to the pointer data, and the creation of the digital music sound data based on the content data of the sound output set corresponding to each pointer data is transferred to the register 622a in advance. It is done using the sound data.

The content data of the data transfer in the sequence data SD is used in the data transfer unit 622c to specify the data read timing from the sound / light ROM 610, and is in the area of the sound / light ROM 610 in which the data to be read is stored. Used to identify address data. Data of data transfer Data so that there are a plurality of predetermined pointer data between the read timing of the sound data corresponding to one channel and the read timing of the sound data corresponding to the next channel. Read instruction data is set. In the data of the data read instruction of 1, data for reading the sound data of the data amount capable of outputting the sound for a predetermined time is set, and the sound data is 1 for any of HWD622b and SCM622d. It corresponds to one channel. Therefore, when a plurality of digital musical tone data are combined and the sound is output, data reading instructions for the number of the digital musical tone data are given. Further, the sound data read based on the data read instruction of 1 corresponds to the data that enables sound output over 700 μsec as the predetermined time in the corresponding channel. In this case, HWD622b and SCM622d each have 16 channels, and the time required to read 700 μsec of sound data for all of these 16 channels is shorter than 700 μsec. This makes it possible to create digital musical tone data that enables continuous output of sound for the next predetermined time for the predetermined time while outputting sound for the predetermined time.

Data is read from the common sound / light ROM 610 in each of the data transfer unit 621c of the control core 621 and the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622. The sound / light ROM 610 is configured to use a memory (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that does not require external power supply for storage retention as read-only. Specifically, although the NOR type flash memory is used as the sound / light ROM 610, a NAND type flash memory may be used. The sound and light ROM 610 stores various control programs and fixed value data used when executing processing according to the programs.

The data structure of the sound and light ROM 610 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 81. In the sound / light ROM 610, program data (1), program data (2), ..., Program data (L) for executing processing for effect control by CPU 621a of the control core 621 are stored in advance. It is remembered. By using these program data, the CPU 621a executes main processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the processing data (1), the processing data (2), ..., And the processing data (M) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. These processing data include a data table used to execute each effect, sequence data and parameter data to be provided to the sound output core 622. Further, the command data (1), the command data (2), ..., And the command data (N) are stored in advance in the sound / light ROM 610. These command data are used in the CPU 621a of the control core 621 to instruct the display control device 500 of the effect content.

In the sound / light ROM 610, in addition to the data used for executing the processing by the CPU 621a of the control core 621 as described above, the light emission data (1), the light emission data (2), ..., The light emission data (P) is stored, and sound data (1), sound data (2), ..., Sound data (Q) are stored. In each light emission data, information on the type, lighting period, and lighting order of the light emitting unit to be lit by the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is set in the predetermined effect period, and the contents of these light emission patterns are set. It differs depending on the type of each emission data. Each light emission data stored in the sound light ROM 610 has a different light emission control period, and the content of the light emission pattern is different. Further, each sound data includes a recorded data composed of a sine wave, and also includes a square wave data used for outputting an electronic sound.

As shown in FIG. 78, the sound / light ROM 610 is electrically connected to the memory controller 624 of the sound / light SOC 620 via the address bus SL1 and the data bus SL2. The memory controller 624 is electrically connected to the control core 621 via the address bus SL3 and the data bus SL4, and is also electrically connected to the sound output core 622 via the address bus SL5 and the data bus SL6. ..

The address data to be read-instructed is transmitted from the data transfer unit 621c of the control core 621 to the memory controller 624 via the address bus SL3. The memory controller 624 includes a control side address buffer 624a for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 621c, and newly addresses data from the data transfer unit 621c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. Is received, the address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer unit 621c via the data bus SL4, whereby the data transfer unit 621c normally accepts the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 621c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the control side address buffer 624a, the address data is not stored in the control side address buffer 624a. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 621c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 621c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 621c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data via the address bus SL1 to the sound / optical ROM 610, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 610. Then, the received data is transmitted to the internal register of the RAM 621b of the control core 621 or the CPU 621a via the data bus SL4.

The address data to be read-instructed is transmitted from the data transfer unit 622c of the sound output core 622 to the memory controller 624 via the address bus SL5. The memory controller 624 includes a sound output side address buffer 624b for storing the address data received from the data transfer unit 622c, and is newly addressed from the data transfer unit 622c in a situation where the unprocessed address data is not stored. When the data is received, the address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. At this time, a normal reception signal indicating that the address data has been normally received is transmitted from the memory controller 624 to the data transfer unit 622c via the data bus SL6, whereby the data transfer unit 622c normally receives the address data. It is identified that it was done. On the other hand, when the unprocessed address data is newly received from the data transfer unit 622c in the situation where the unprocessed address data is stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b, the address data is not stored in the sound output side address buffer 624b. In this case, since the normal reception signal is not transmitted to the data transfer unit 622c, it is specified that the data transfer unit 622c needs to transmit the same address data again.

When corresponding to the address data transmitted from the data transfer unit 622c, the memory controller 624 transmits the address data to the sound / optical ROM 610 via the address bus SL1, and the data corresponding to the address data via the data bus SL2. Is received from the sound / light ROM 610. Then, the received data is transmitted to the register 622a of the sound output core 622 via the data bus SL6.

A clock circuit is built in the memory controller 624, and processing in the memory controller 624 is performed in synchronization with a clock signal periodically transmitted from the clock circuit. In this case, the cycle of the clock signal is shorter than the cycle of the clock signal of the data transfer unit 622c and the cycle of the clock signal of the sound output core 622, specifically 15 MHz.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the first to seventh embodiments, the case where the ending period of the jackpot game is fixed has been described. In this embodiment, all round games of the jackpot game are completed according to the type of the jackpot, specifically, the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10. An embodiment in which the ending period is changed will be described later. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to seventh embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the pachinko machine 10 major winning opening opening / closing process according to the present embodiment.
In step S3201, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the large winning opening 83a is open. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3202. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3206.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is not open (NO), the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less and the value of the round counter RC is "0" in step S3202. It is determined whether or not it is as follows. When it is determined in step S3202 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” or less (YES), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3202 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is "0" in step S3203. It is determined whether or not it is less than or equal to. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3203 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3203 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the large winning opening opening process in step S3204. Since the large winning opening opening process has already been described with reference to FIG. 32, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In step S3205, the MPU 302 sets an open command. Further, the MPU 302 transmits the release command set in step S3205 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the open / close door 83b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3201 that the large winning opening 83a is open (YES), whether or not the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less in step S3206, that is, opening the large winning opening. It is determined in step S3203 or step S3206 of the process whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed.

When it is determined in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 detects whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a in step S3207. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not a prize has been generated in the large winning opening 83a is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 153 corresponding to the large winning opening 83a.

When the MPU 302 determines in step S3207 that no prize has been awarded to the large prize opening 83a (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when it is determined in step S3207 that a prize has been awarded to the large winning opening 83a (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the winning counter PC in step S3208.

In step S3209, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3209 that the value of the winning counter PC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3209 that the value of the winning counter PC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the closing execution process in step S3210. In this closing execution process, the MPU 302 sets the opening / closing door 83b in the closed state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 83c.

In step S3211, the MPU 302 sets the closure command. The MPU 302 transmits the closing command set in step S3211 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). The voice emission control device 400 recognizes that the opening / closing door 83b is set to the closed state based on the closing command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S3212, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the hit / fail result is a “special miss result”. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3218, which will be described later.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the hit / fail result is not a "special miss result" (NO), the MPU 302 executes the processes after step S3213. In step S3213, the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. Further, in step S3214, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is not "0" or less (NO), the value of the timer counter T is set to "500" in step S3215. After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process.

Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S3215 is an open standby until the open / close door 83b is set to the open state, then the open / close door 83b is set to the closed state again, and then the open / close door 83b is set to the open state again. It defines the time. In the first embodiment, the open waiting time is set to 1 sec, but the open waiting time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3214 that the value of the round counter RC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the processing after step S3216. In step S3216, the MPU 302 performs an ending period setting process. In this ending period setting process, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table, determines the ending period according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol, and corresponds to the determined ending period. Set the value in the timer counter T. The details of the ending period setting process will be described later.

The waiting time for the ending is the same as the waiting time for the opening regardless of the type of the game result. That is, the waiting time for this ending is the same regardless of the type of open / close execution mode. The waiting time for the ending is not limited to this, and may be slightly different depending on the type of the game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. Further, for example, the waiting time for the ending is significantly different between the case where the game result is "low probability result" or "most advantageous result" and the case where the game result is other than these. It may be configured to be greatly different depending on the type of.

In step S3217, the MPU 302 sets an ending command. The MPU 302 transmits the ending command set in step S3217 to the voice emission control device 400 in step S301 of the above-mentioned normal processing (see FIG. 24). After that, the MPU 302 ends the large winning opening opening / closing process. The voice emission control device 400 recognizes the end of the open / close execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 302, and executes a predetermined process.

Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3206 that the value of the timer counter T is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the process after step S3210 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3212 that the result of success or failure is a "special deviation result" (YES), the MPU 302 is updated by subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close counter SOC in step S3218.

In step S3219, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less. When the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not "0" or less (NO), the MPU 302 executes the process after step S3215 described above. Further, when the MPU 302 determines in step S3219 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is "0" or less (YES), the MPU 302 executes the above-mentioned processing after S3215.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a data table of an ending period determination table stored in ROM 312 of the main control device 300 of the present embodiment. More specifically, it is an ending period determination table for determining the ending period after all the round games in the jackpot game are completed. In the present embodiment, the ending period is determined according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, in the case of special symbol 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as special figure 1), if the mode is a high probability mode, “10 sec” is determined as the ending period, and the mode is the low probability mode. If so, "5 sec" is determined as the ending period. Further, in the case of special symbol 2 (hereinafter, also referred to as special figure 2), "5 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is a high probability mode, and "2 sec" is determined as the ending period if the mode is a low probability mode. Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 83, when the special symbols are the same, the ending period is set to be different depending on whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, but the special symbols are the same. In some cases, the ending period may be the same regardless of whether the mode is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The ending period shown in FIG. 83 is merely an example, and is not limited to the time shown in FIG. 83 (10 sec, 5 sec, 2 sec), and the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability mode or low). The ending period may be different depending on the probability mode).

FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the ending period setting process of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the process of setting the ending period will be described with reference to FIG. 84.
In step S3301, the MPU 302 confirms the game state at the time of winning the big hit game. Specifically, the game state at the time of winning the jackpot game is confirmed based on the contents of the flags (flags corresponding to the type commands transmitted from the main control device 300) stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 313. Next, in step S3302, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1. When the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 in step S3302 (YES), in step S3303, the MPU 302 determines whether or not the mode is a high probability mode. When the mode is the high probability mode in step S3303 (YES), in step S3304, the MPU 302 sets the ending period to "10 sec" with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. .. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "5000" corresponding to the ending period of 10 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, when the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S3303, in other words, when the mode is the low probability mode, in step S3305, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. , Set the ending period to "5 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "2500" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, in step S3302, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is not special figure 1 (NO), in other words, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 2, in step S3306, the mode of the MPU 302 has a high probability. Determine if it is a mode. When the mode is the high probability mode in step S3306 (YES), in step S3305, the MPU 302 sets the ending period to "5 sec" with reference to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. .. Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "2500" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 313.

Further, when the mode is not the high probability mode (NO) in step S3306, in other words, when the mode is the low probability mode, in step S3307, the MPU 302 refers to the ending period determination table (see FIG. 83) stored in the ROM 312. , Set the ending period to "2 sec". Specifically, since the timer interrupt process is performed in a cycle of 2 msec, the MPU 302 sets "1000" corresponding to the ending period of 5 sec in the timer counter T.

The value set in the timer counter T in step S3304, step S3305, and step S3307 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. The configuration for measuring the ending period is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of the RUSH entry and the right-handed navigation for RUSH according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 85, in the present embodiment, since the ending period changes depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the pachinko machine 10 is selected by the MPU 302. The notification timing of the RUSH rush and the right-handed navigation for RUSH (suggestion of the right-handed game at the time of transition to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode)) is changed according to the ending period. Hereinafter, the transition process of the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 85 (a), the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. A case where (TE ≧ (TX + TY)) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the RUSH rush from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Notification (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "Please right-hand" Audio output (reproduction)) is controlled to be performed within the ending period TE.

More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" starts from T1 at the start of the ending period after the voice start time TW4, and after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", "Please hit right". Audio output is started. Here, the voice start time TW4 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ending period TE, and the ending period. At the end of, the voice output of "Please hit right" is controlled to end at the same time as T2 or almost at the same time.

If the ending period TE is the same as the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the time of TW4 is 0 sec. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (a), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85A, the period of the intro part of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is shorter than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends before T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (a), the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" starts from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW4, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled. In addition, following the output of the voice of "RUSH rush", the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output, and at the end of the ending period, "Right-handed" at the same time as or almost at the same time as T2. It is controlled so that the output of the voice of "Please" ends. Therefore, it is possible to shift the game state without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Is controlled.

<Pattern B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), the ending period TE is calculated from the time obtained by adding the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. The case where the time is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), when the ending period TE is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, and is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush. , Notification of RUSH rush from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, voice output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") is performed during the ending period TE, and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically). Is controlled so that the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right" is performed after the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period to 5 after the audio start time TW5. Here, the voice start time TW5 is a value obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the ending period TE, and is "○○ RUSH rush" at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period. The audio output of is controlled to end. Further, after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", in other words, the voice output of "Please hit right" is started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period.

If the ending period TE is the same as the notification time TX of RUSH entry, the time of TW5 is 0 sec. Further, also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (b), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (b), the ending period TE and the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 have the same length (time). Therefore, the output of the intro portion ends at T2 at the end of the ending period. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (b), the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" starts from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW5, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to do. Further, at the end of the ending period, a voice of "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game is output at T2, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the output of the "Please hit right" voice is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Further, at the end of the ending period, T2, the video effect of the effect MA is controlled to start. Therefore, it is possible to shift the game state without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned. At the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "Please hit right", characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Is controlled.

<Pattern C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (c), the ending period TE is calculated from the time obtained by adding the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. The case where the signal is short (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of RUSH entry will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (c), when the ending period TE is shorter than the RUSH rush notification time TX, the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, the voice of “〇〇RUSH rush”). The output (reproduction)) and the notification of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, the voice output (reproduction) of "please right-handed") are controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, in the case of FIG. 85 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. If you start the voice output of "Please hit right" after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", the right-handed navigation for RUSH has not started even though you have already entered RUSH mode. It becomes disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the voice of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering the RUSH mode, the voice overlaps with "RUSH rush". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the sound of "Please hit right", and "right-handed". The voice output of "Please" is started after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

Also in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the music in the RUSH mode, which shifts from T1 at the start of the ending period to after the jackpot game, is controlled to start output (reproduction). Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the period of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is longer than the ending period TE. Therefore, the output of the intro portion continues even after T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Further, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the verse portion following the intro portion is continuously output after the output of the intro portion of the music is completed.

Further, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C during the output period of the intro portion. As described above, the audio output of "RUSH rush" starts from T1 at the start of the ending period after the audio start time TW6, and the output of the "RUSH rush" audio ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the output end of the intro part. Is controlled to do. Here, the voice start time TW6 is the same as the ending period TE. In the example shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C at T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Therefore, when the voice of "Please hit right" to suggest a right-handed game is output at the end of the ending period TE, the voice of "RUSH rush" and the voice of "Please hit right" are output. Are overlapped and output. Therefore, in the transition process shown in FIG. 85 (c), the voice of "Please hit right" is not output to T2 at the end of the ending period TE, and a right-handed game is suggested at T2 at the end of the ending period TE. Characters such as "Please hit right" are displayed on the display screen G, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start. That is, the display of characters such as "Please hit right" on the display screen G is controlled to start at the end of the ending period, in other words, at the start of the fourth mode M4 (RUSH mode). Therefore, it is possible to shift the game state without dividing the flow of the game state, and the player can enjoy the game without losing the exhilaration of the series of flow of the game state, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be planned.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
In step S3401, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 413. If the MPU 402 determines in step S3401 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S3402, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. The ending period TE may be acquired by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 300, or the ending period determination table shown in FIG. 83. Is also stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400, and the type (type) and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol is determined from the command type so that the ending period TE is recognized. May be good. Further, in step S3401, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3403, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH mode music that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) in the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3404, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time (TE ≧ (TX + TY)) obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. In step S3404, when the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (YES), in step S3405, the MPU 402 is set to step S3409 described later. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time of. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the TW 4 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3404, if the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (NO), the MPU 402 has the ending period TE in step S3406. , It is determined whether or not the notification time of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX). When the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the RUSH entry notification time TX in step S3406 (YES), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S3409 described later in step S3407. Set the timer counter T. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the TW 5 is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

If the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX in step S3406 (NO), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S3409 described later in step S3408. Set the timer counter T. Specifically, the data table stored in the ROM 412 is referred to, and the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3409, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the time set in step S3405, step S3407 or step S3408 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S3405, step S3407, or step S3408 has not elapsed in step S3409 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Further, when the time set in step S3405, step S3407 or step S3408 has elapsed in step S3409 (YES), in step S3410, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3411, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed. When the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed in step S3411 (YES), in step S3412, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the voice of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S3411 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In addition, in FIGS. 85 and 86, the ending period TE determined according to whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, and the notification time TX for RUSH entry and the right-handed navigation for RUSH. The notification timing of "RUSH rush" and "Please hit right" is determined based on the comparison with the notification time TY of, but whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. The ending period TE determined accordingly and the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH are known in advance. Therefore, depending on whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the notification timings of "RUSH rush" and "please hit right" may be determined in advance.

FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a data table of a notification timing determination table for RUSH inrush and right-handed navigation for RUSH stored in ROM 412 of the voice emission control device of the present embodiment. More specifically, it is a data table for determining the notification timing of the RUSH entry that notifies the player of the RUSH mode that shifts after the big hit game. The notification timing of RUSH entry is determined with reference to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the special symbol. For example, in the case of the special figure 1, if the mode is a high probability mode, "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is a low probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing. Further, in the case of the special figure 2, if the mode is the high probability mode, "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, and if the mode is the low probability mode, "TE" is determined as the notification timing.

Here, "TW4", "TW5", and "TE" are waiting times (waiting times) from T1 at the start of the ending period, and when "TW4" is determined as the notification timing, at the start of the ending period. After T1 to TW4, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started. When "TW5" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period to TW5. Further, when "TE" is determined as the notification timing, the notification of "RUSH rush" is started from T1 at the start of the ending period to after TE, that is, at the end of the ending period.

FIG. 88 is a diagram showing another example of the flowchart of the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, another example of the flowchart of the effect transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88.
In step S3501, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3501 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S3502, the MPU 402 provides information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 300. Further, in step S3501, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3503, the MPU 402 starts outputting RUSH mode music (BGM) that shifts after the jackpot game. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data in the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is stored in the speaker units 26A to 26A. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3504, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3504, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 uses various counters of the RAM 413 to measure the time of step S3509 described later in step S3505. Set the timer counter T provided in the area. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW4 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3504, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 has the special symbol type of special figure 1 and the mode is low in step S3506. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3506, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is set to step S3507. Then, a timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time in step S3509, which will be described later. Specifically, the value corresponding to TW5 is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3506, when the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, and the special symbol type is special figure 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 is set in step S3508. , A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set in order to measure the time in step S3509, which will be described later. Specifically, the value corresponding to the ending period TE is set in the timer counter T with reference to the notification timing determination table (FIG. 87) stored in the ROM 412. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3509, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has not elapsed in step S3509 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Further, when the time set in step S3505, step S3507 or step S3508 has elapsed in step S3509 (YES), in step S3510, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rush voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rush voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3511, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed. When the output of the voice data of the RUSH entry is completed in step S3511 (YES), in step S3512, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the voice of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S3511 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. If it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX), the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is at the start of the ending period. It is started from T1 after the voice start time TW5, and is controlled so that the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" ends at the same time as or substantially at the same time as T2 at the end of the ending period. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T1 at the start of the ending period. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

As described above, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), when the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to be started from T1 at the start of the ending period, the timer counter T is performed in step S3407 of FIG. The value set to 0 may be set to 0, or if the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH entry in step S3406 of FIG. 86 (YES), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3410. good.

Further, in the pattern B of FIG. 85 (b), when the voice output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to be started from T1 at the start of the ending period, the value of TW5 in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be 0, and in step S3506 of FIG. 88, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. (YES), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3510.

Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), the ending period TE adds the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. When it is shorter than the time (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX (TE <TX), the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically). Is the voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush" and the notification of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically, the voice output (playback) of "Please hit right") at the end of the ending period TE after T2. It is controlled to be done. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T1 at the start of the ending period. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

As described above, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), when the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to be started from T1 at the start of the ending period, the timer counter T is performed in step S3408 of FIG. The value set to 0 may be set to 0, or in step S3406 of FIG. 86, when the ending period TE is not equal to or longer than the notification time TX of RUSH entry (NO), the MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3410. ..

Further, in the pattern C of FIG. 85 (c), when the voice output of “○○ RUSH rush” is controlled to be started from T1 at the start of the ending period, the value of TE in the notification timing determination table shown in FIG. May be 0, and in step S3506 of FIG. 88, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, and the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is not the high probability mode ( NO), MPU 402 may perform the operation of step S3510.

Next, another example of the transition process to the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, RUSH mode) of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. In the example shown in FIG. 89, the transition process when the ending period TE and the length of the intro portion of the music (BGM) of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter, referred to as the intro length TI) is different will be described. Hereinafter, another example of the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 89.

<Migration process A>
First, a case where the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI (when 10 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (a). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In this first special effect, for example, a voice such as "Begin!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and a video corresponding to this voice (for example, a video in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the player is allowed to move to the RUSH mode, and an effect of giving a feeling of anticipation and an uplifting feeling is executed.

Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 89A, the RUSH rush notification is performed before the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed after the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, a case where the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI (when 5 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (b). In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In this second special production, the number of prize balls and the logo mark acquired in the big hit game are displayed on the display screen G, and it feels as if the ending period is continuing even though the RUSH mode is entered. The effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the ending period TE length and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and the logo mark obtained in the big hit game may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character may be displayed. May be controlled to adjust the time by displaying.

Specifically, from T1 at the start of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the fourth mode M4 is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the second special effect is executed from T2 at the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the intro output, T4 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 89 (b), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, a case where the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84) will be described with reference to FIG. 89 (c). .. In the transition process in this case, since the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no output of the intro portion during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 89 (c), the intro output is started after the ending period TE is completed. Further, after the output of the intro is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output.

Specifically, from T2 at the end of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed.

When the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI (when 2 sec is set as the ending period TE in the ending period setting process of FIG. 84), the output of the intro portion is as shown in FIG. 89 (d). It may be controlled so that the output of the verse portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without performing the above. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 89 (c) and 89 (d), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 89 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described.

In step S3601, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. When the MPU 402 determines in step S3601 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S3602, the MPU 402 provides information on whether the type and mode of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the high probability mode or the low probability mode. get. Specifically, the MPU 402 acquires whether the type and mode of the special symbol is the high-probability mode or the low-probability mode based on the type command received from the main control device 300. Further, in step S3601, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S3603, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is the special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3603, when the type of the special symbol is special figure 1 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is the transition process A (YES) described in step S3604 with reference to FIG. 89 (a). (If the ending period TE is longer than the intro length TI) is executed. The details of the migration process A will be described later.

In step S3603, when the special symbol type of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), in step S3605, the special symbol type is special figure 1 and the mode is low. It is determined whether the mode is the probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode. In step S3605, when the type of the special symbol is the special figure 1 and the mode is the low probability mode, or the type of the special symbol is the special figure 2 and the mode is the high probability mode (YES), the MPU 402 is set to step S3606. Then, the transition process B (when the ending period TE is shorter than the intro length TI) described with reference to FIG. 89B is executed. The details of the migration process B will be described later.

In step S3605, when the type of the special symbol of the jackpot game is special figure 1 and the mode is not the high probability mode (NO), the MPU 402 refers to FIGS. 89 (c) and 89 (d) in step S3607. The transition process C described above (when the ending period TE is much shorter than the intro length TI) is executed. The details of the migration process C will be described later.

<Migration process A>
Next, the transition process A in step S3604 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process A.
In step S3701, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S3703 and S3705 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value corresponding to the ending period TE (10 sec) in the timer counter T1 as the measurement time, and sets the value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "5000", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". .. The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3702, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is set as a speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect video for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the effect video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3703, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process A without executing the processes after step S3704. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3704.

In step S3704, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "Begin!". The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of the above is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Beginning!" Is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the image corresponding to this voice (for example, the image in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402.

Further, in step S3704, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush after the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and makes a sound. It is set in the register 403b of the output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "Beginning!" May be displayed as characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the voice of "Beginning!" May be output from the speaker units 26A to. It may be output from 26C and the character of "RUSH rush" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S3705, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3701 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process A without executing the processes after step S3706. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3706. In step S3706, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of voice such as "Begin!" Is stopped from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3707, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "please right-handed" from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3708, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S3703 and S3705 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process B>
Next, the transition process B in step S3606 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process B.
In step S3801, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T1 and T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S3803 and S3806 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value corresponding to the ending period TE (5 sec) in the timer counter T1 as the measurement time, and sets the value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "2500", and when the intro length TI is 7 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "3500". .. The values set in the timer counters T1 and T2 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3802, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is set as a speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect video for the ending period. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the effect video for the ending period is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3803, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3804. Further, when it is determined that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3804. In step S3804, the MPU 402 starts the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to display a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP505 to display the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S3805, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "please right-handed" from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S3806, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S3801 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3807. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processing after step S3807.
In step S3807, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 that the MPU 402 stops the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls to stop the display of the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402. I do.

In step S3808, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the “RUSH rush” voice for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the “RUSH rush”. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "RUSH rush" may be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S3809, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S3803 and S3806 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process C>
Next, the transition process C in step S3607 of FIG. 90 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process C.
In step S3901, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T1 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S3902 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the ending period TE (2 sec) in the timer counter T1 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T1 to "1000". The value set in the timer counter T1 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S3902, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T1 set in step S3901 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process B without executing the processes after step S3903. Further, when it is determined that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S3903.

In step S3903, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for RUSH mode production from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is set as a speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect video in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect image of the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the RUSH mode production image is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S3904, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data for right-handed navigation for RUSH "please right-handed" from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (playback) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S3902 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 provides the player with a transition means (MPU302) for shifting the gaming state from the jackpot game (first gaming state) to the RUSH mode (second gaming state) and the RUSH mode (second gaming state). Notification control that performs RUSH rush notification (first notification) that enables recognition at different timings depending on the type of jackpot game, specifically the type and mode of the special symbol, depending on whether the mode is high-probability mode or low-probability mode. It is provided with means (MPU 402, speaker units 26A to 26C). The length of the ending period of the pachinko machine may differ depending on the type of jackpot, specifically the type and mode of the special figure, depending on whether the mode is high-probability mode or low-probability mode. If the first notification is performed without considering the length of the game, the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the first notification is performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). There is a possibility that the first notification will be notified at a timing when there is a sense of incongruity. However, since the pachinko machine 10 performs the RUSH rush notification (first notification) at different timings depending on the type of the jackpot game (first game state), the RUSH rush notification (first notification) does not cause a sense of discomfort to the player. The first notification) can be performed, and the interest is improved.

(2) The notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH entry (first) according to the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state). Notification) is performed at different timings. Therefore, the RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

(3) The notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is notified that the length of the ending period of the jackpot game (first game state) is RUSH entry (first notification). The RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed at different timings depending on whether or not the time is shorter than the time required for the RUSH. Therefore, the RUSH rush notification (first notification) is performed without considering the length of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or the RUSH mode is entered. It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed later (with a slight delay).

[9th Embodiment]
In the first to eighth embodiments described above, an embodiment in which the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect is selected during the round of the jackpot game has been described. In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the type of effect of the fourth mode M4 (hereinafter referred to as RUSH mode) is selected during the ending period of the jackpot game will be described. Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described, but the same components as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate description will be omitted.

FIG. 94 is a schematic diagram showing the timing of the effect type selection process of the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 94 describes the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the first to eighth embodiments and the timing of the effect type selection process corresponding to the present embodiment for comparison. FIG. 94A is a diagram showing a flow when the selection effect is executed during the round game of the first to eighth embodiments. FIG. 94B is a diagram showing a flow when the selection effect is executed during the ending period of the present embodiment. In FIG. 94, "OP" indicates the opening, "ED" indicates the ending, and "R" indicates the round.

First, with reference to FIG. 94 (a), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the round game will be described. In the voice emission control device 400, the opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time point t10). Next, when the opening time ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time point t11). After that, when the round game of a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) is completed, the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process as a round effect (time point t12).

In the voice emission control device 400, when the effect type selection process is executed during the round game, the selection effect is executed in the same display mode as when the effect type selection process is executed as the ending effect. After that, when all the round games are completed, the voice emission control device 400 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time point t13). After that, when the ending period ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the ending effect and ends the jackpot game (time point t14). Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the selected effect mode (for example, effect MB) is set, and the voice emission control device 400 displays the background image corresponding to the effect MB.

Next, with reference to FIG. 94 (b), the flow of the effect during the jackpot game when the selection effect is executed during the ending period will be described. In the voice emission control device 400, the opening effect is started with the start of the jackpot game (time point t20). Next, when the opening time ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the opening effect, starts the round game, and starts the round effect (time point t21).

After that, when all the round games (for example, 15 times) are completed, the voice emission control device 400 ends the round effect and starts the ending effect (time point t22). At this time, in the voice emission control device 400, the selection effect is executed as the ending effect. Specifically, the voice emission control device 400 displays an operation image corresponding to the effects MA to MC in the RUSH mode. Further, in the voice emission control device 400, the information corresponding to the currently selected effect MB is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the effect MA and MC different from the currently selected effect MB.

Further, when the operation button 35 is operated during the execution of the selection effect and the selected effect is changed, the information corresponding to the newly selected effect MA is not selected in the voice emission control device 400. It is displayed larger than the information corresponding to the production MB and MC (time point t23). After that, when the ending period ends, the voice emission control device 400 ends the ending effect (selection effect) and ends the jackpot game (time point t24). Then, after the jackpot game is completed, the selected effect mode (here, effect MA) is set, and the voice emission control device 400 displays the background image corresponding to the effect MA.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the effect type selection process of the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the effect type selection process is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the MPU 402 of the voice emission control device 400 executes the effect type selection process after receiving the ending command in step S1514 of FIG. 40, which is the effect determination process of the first to eighth embodiments. different. Hereinafter, the effect type selection process of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95.

In step S4001, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the game result is the "most advantageous result" based on the content of the received type command. When the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the game result is not the "most advantageous result" (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

When the MPU 402 determines in step S4001 that the game result is the "most advantageous result" (YES), has the ending command been received in step S4002 (the flag of the ending command is stored in various flag areas of the RAM 413)? Whether or not) is determined. When the MPU 402 determines in step S4002 that the ending command has not been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process.

In step S4002, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4003, the timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to the ending period TE in order to measure the ending period. Set the corresponding value. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4004, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to start the effect type selection effect. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402 to display an image of the effect type selection effect, specifically, an image shown in FIG. 46 (I) on the display screen G. indicate.

In step S4005, the MPU 402 accepts the selection of the effect type modes MA, MB, and MC by the operation button 35 by the player. The player presses down the left-direction button 35b and / or the right-direction button 35c of the operation button 35, and selects an image corresponding to the desired effect MA to MC from the images GA to GC displayed on the display screen G. .. In step S4005, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GA, the selected image GA is displayed larger than the other image GBs and GCs. do. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GA larger than the other image GBs and GCs.

Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GB, the selected image GB is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GCs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GB larger than the other image GAs and GCs. Further, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so that when the player operates the operation button 35 to select the image GC, the selected image GC is displayed larger than the other image GAs and GBs. In the display control device 500, based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 to display the selected image GC larger than the other image GAs and GBs.

In step S4006, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the player operates the operation button 35 to determine the effect, that is, whether or not the pressing operation of the determination button 35a is accepted. When it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a has been accepted (YES), in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect corresponding to the selected image as the effect of the RUSH mode. That is, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GA selected in step S4006, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MA as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MA shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode.

Further, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GB selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MB as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MB shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MB in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode. Further, in step S4006, when the determination operation is accepted with the image GC selected, in step S4007, the MPU 402 sets the effect MC as the effect of the RUSH mode in which the effect MC shifts after the first mode M1. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MC in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode.

In step S4008, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE set in step S4003 has elapsed based on the value of the timer counter. If it is determined in step S4008 that the ending period TE has elapsed (YES), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection process. Further, if it is determined in step S4008 that the ending period TE has not elapsed (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to notify the player whether to cancel the determined effect in step S4009. ..

Specifically, the MPU 402 controls the display control device 500 so as to display a character image confirming whether to cancel the determined effect such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and displays a character image such as "Do you want to cancel the effect?" On the display screen G. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the voice of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads out the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the voice of "Cancel the effect?" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412, and inputs the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the sound of "Do you want to cancel the effect?" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4010, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect determined in step S4006 has been cancelled. Specifically, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the effect has been canceled based on the operation of the player's operation button 35. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect has been canceled (YES), the MPU 402 returns to the operation of step S4005. If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect has not been canceled (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

Further, when it is determined in step S4006 that the pressing operation of the decision button 35a is not accepted (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4011 whether or not the ending period set in step S4003 has ended. Judgment is based on the value of. When it is determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (YES), the MPU 402 sets a predetermined effect (for example, effect MA) by the initial setting as the effect in the RUSH mode in step S4012. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the flag of the effect MA in the various setting flag storage areas of the RAM 413 as an effect of the RUSH mode. If it is determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (YES), the effect corresponding to the image selected on the display screen G may be automatically determined as the effect in the RUSH mode. When the effect is set in step S4012, the MPU 402 ends the effect type selection effect process.

If it is not determined in step S4011 that the ending period has ended (NO), the MPU 402 instructs the player to notify the player to select / determine the effect in step S4013. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the display control device 500 so as to display a character image prompting the selection / decision of the effect such as "determine the effect!" Or "determine the effect!" On the display screen G. Control. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP 505 based on the instruction from the MPU 402, and the display screen G displays "determine the effect!", "Determine the effect!", Etc. Display a character image that prompts you to select and decide. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Specifically, the MPU 402 stores sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to voices such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Stored in the common ROM 404 of the ROM 412. It is read out and set in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that sounds such as "determine the effect!" And "determine the effect!" Are output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. ..

FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the notification timing of the RUSH entry and the right-handed navigation for RUSH according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 96, in the present embodiment, since the RUSH effect is determined during the ending period of the jackpot game, the pachinko machine 10 is for RUSH entry and RUSH according to the remaining time of the ending period after the effect is determined. The notification timing of the right-handed game (suggestion of right-handed game) at the time of transition to the right-handed navigation (RUSH mode) is changed. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 96.

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode effect is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effect is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 96A to 96C, the output (playback) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is started from the time point T3 when the production of the RUSH mode is determined. Is controlled by.

<Pattern A>
First, referring to FIG. 96 (a), the remaining time TR (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time TR) of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode production is the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush. A case where the time (TR ≧ (TX + TY)) is equal to or longer than the sum of the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH and RUSH will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96A, when the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, the RUSH rush from the speaker units 26A to 26C Notification (specifically, voice output (playback) of "○○ RUSH rush") and notification time of right-handed navigation for RUSH from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, "Please right-hand" Audio output (reproduction)) is controlled to be performed within the remaining time TR.
More specifically, the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush from the remaining time TR from T3 when the production is decided, and the notification time (voice) of the right-handed navigation for TX and RUSH. Output time) It starts after the lapse of time (TR- (TX + TY)) after subtracting TY, and after the notification of RUSH rush, the voice output of "Please hit right" is started.

<Pattern B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 96 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the RUSH mode effect is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH entry and the notification time of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. (Audio output time) A case where the time is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY (TR <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (audio output time) of RUSH entry is TX or more (TR ≧ TX) will be described. As shown in FIG. 96B, when the remaining time TR is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH rush and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH, and is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush. , Notification of RUSH rush from speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, voice output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") is performed within the remaining time TR, and notification of right-handed navigation for RUSH (specifically). Is controlled so that the audio output (playback) of "Please hit right" is performed after the ending period ends.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is the elapsed time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX from the remaining time TR from T3 at the time of determining the production. It will be started later, and then the voice output of "Please hit right" will be started.

<Pattern C>
Next, referring to FIG. 96 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE after the determination of the effect of the RUSH mode is shorter than the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH entry (TR <TX). Will be explained. As shown in FIG. 96 (c), when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is shorter than the notification time TX of the RUSH rush, the RUSH rush notification from the speaker units 26A to 26C (specifically, “〇〇RUSH” The audio output (reproduction) of "rush" is controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE.

More specifically, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is started from T3 at the time of determining the production, after the remaining time TR has elapsed. Further, in the case shown in FIG. 96 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE. If you start the voice output of "Please hit right" after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush", the right-handed navigation for RUSH has not started even though you have already entered RUSH mode. It becomes disadvantageous to the player. Also, if the voice of "Please hit right" is output at the same time as entering the RUSH mode, the voice overlaps with "RUSH rush". Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 96 (c), right-handed navigation for RUSH by video is started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the sound of "Please hit right", and "right-handed". The voice output of "Please" is started after the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode effect is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effect is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 96 (c), the output (reproduction) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is controlled to be started from the time when the production of the RUSH mode is determined.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment. Hereinafter, the transition process to the RUSH mode of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. In this embodiment, since the RUSH mode effect is selected and determined during the ending period, the RUSH mode effect is not determined at the start of the ending period, and the RUSH mode music is output (played) from the start of the ending period. )Can not do it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the output (reproduction) of the music (BGM) in the RUSH mode is started from the time when the production of the RUSH mode is determined.

In step S4101, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If it is determined in step S4101 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4102, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE. Here, the acquisition of the ending period TE may be obtained by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control unit 300, or the ending period TE may be acquired. The time may be stored in advance in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400 so that it can be acquired.

Next, in step S4103, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S4106, which will be described later. Further, in step S4101, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Next, in step S4104, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be transferred after the jackpot game is determined. In step S4104, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be transferred after the jackpot game is determined (YES), in step S4105, the MPU 402 outputs the RUSH mode music (BGM) to be transferred after the jackpot game. Start. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, the parameter data, and the sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the determined effect MA to MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and sets the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. It is set and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music in the RUSH mode corresponding to the effect determined from the speaker units 26A to 26C is started.

More specifically, when the effect MA is determined, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MA from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and outputs the sound. It is set in the register 403b of the LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. When the effect MB is determined, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MB from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and registers 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Is set to, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, when the effect MC is determined, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data (BGM) corresponding to the effect MC from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and registers 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Is set to, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the music data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

Next, in step S4106, the MPU 402 calculates the remaining time TR (hereinafter, also referred to as the remaining time TR) of the ending period TE. Specifically, the MPU 402 calculates the time (hereinafter, also referred to as measurement time) of stopping the timer started in step S4103, starting in step S4103, and stopping in step S4106. Next, the MPU 402 subtracts the measurement time from the ending period TE to calculate the remaining time TR of the ending period TE. Further, in step S4104, if it is not determined that the type of the effect of the RUSH mode to be transferred after the big hit game is determined (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S4107, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the time (TR ≧ (TX + TY)) obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. In step S4107, when the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (YES), the MPU 402 is set to the step described later in step S4108. A timer counter T provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 is set to measure the time of S4112. Specifically, the value corresponding to the time (TR- (TX + TY)) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR and the notification time (voice output time) TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4107, when the remaining time TR is shorter than the time obtained by adding the notification time TX of the RUSH entry and the notification time TY of the right-handed navigation for RUSH (NO), the MPU 402 sets the remaining time TR in step S4109. Is determined whether or not the notification time of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX). In step S4109, when the remaining time TR is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of RUSH entry (YES), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S4112 described later in step S4110. Set the timer counter T. Specifically, a value corresponding to the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the RUSH rush notification time (voice output time) TX from the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

When the remaining time TR is shorter than the notification time TX of RUSH entry in step S4109 (NO), the MPU 402 is provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of step S4112 described later in step S4111. Set the timer counter T. Specifically, the value corresponding to the remaining time TR is set in the timer counter T. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4112, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the time set in step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has elapsed, that is, whether or not the value set in the timer counter T has become zero. If the time set in step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has not elapsed in step S4112 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

Further, when the time set in step S4108, step S4110 or step S4111 has elapsed in step S4112 (YES), in step S4113, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the RUSH entry. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the RUSH rushing voice data from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the RUSH rushing voice data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4114, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the voice data for entering the RUSH has been completed. When the output of the RUSH rushing voice data is completed in step S4114 (YES), in step S4115, the MPU 402 starts outputting the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data of the right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the voice of the RUSH rush. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the data is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the RUSH rushing sound is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. If the output of the RUSH rushing audio data is not completed in step S4114 (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In the above description, in the pattern B of FIG. 96 (b), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. If it is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY (TE <(TX + TY)) and the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rush is TX or more (TE ≧ TX), the voice output of "OORUSH rush" is It is controlled to start after the time (TR-TX) obtained by subtracting the notification time (voice output time) TX of the RUSH rush from the remaining time TR from T3 at the time of determining the effect. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T3 at the time of determining the production. Further, even in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

As described above, in the pattern B of FIG. 96 (b), when the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to be started from T3 at the time of determining the effect, the timer counter T is set in step S4110 of FIG. The value to be set may be 0, and in step S4109 of FIG. 97, when the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is equal to or longer than the notification time TX of RUSH entry (YES), the MPU 402 performs the operation of step S4113. You may do it.

Further, in the above description, in the pattern C of FIG. 96 (c), the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is the notification time (voice output time) of the RUSH rush and the notification time (voice output time) of the right-handed navigation for RUSH. When it is shorter than the time obtained by adding TY (TE <(TX + TY)) and shorter than the notification time (voice output time) of RUSH rushing (TE <TX), the notification of RUSH rushing from the speaker units 26A to 26C (Specifically, the audio output (reproduction) of "○○ RUSH rush") is controlled to be performed after T2 at the end of the ending period TE. However, the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" may be started from T3 at the time of determining the production. Further, in this case, the voice output of "Please hit right" may be started at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the voice output of "○○ RUSH rush".

As described above, in the pattern C of FIG. 96 (c), when the audio output of "○○ RUSH rush" is controlled to be started from T3 at the time of determining the effect, the timer counter T is performed in step S4111 of FIG. The value set to 0 may be set to 0, and if the remaining time TR of the ending period TE is not equal to or greater than the RUSH entry notification time TX (NO) in step S4109 of FIG. 97, the MPU 402 performs the operation of step S4113. You may do it.

According to such an embodiment, the following actions / effects can be obtained.
(1) The pachinko machine 10 recognizes to the player the transition means (MPU302) for shifting the gaming state from the jackpot game (first gaming state) to the RUSH mode (second gaming state) for shifting after the jackpot game, and the RUSH mode. Notification control means (MPU402, speaker units 26A to 26C) for notifying RUSH rushing (first notification), and operating means (operation) for accepting determination of the effect type in RUSH mode (second game state). A button 35) is provided, and the notification control means performs notification of RUSH entry (first notification) at different timings according to the timing when the effect type of the RUSH mode (second game state) is determined.

There is a pachinko machine that selects the production type of the RUSH mode that shifts after the jackpot game during the ending period of the jackpot game. In such a case, if the RUSH rush is notified without considering the timing when the production type of the RUSH mode is determined, in other words, the length of the remaining time of the ending period is not taken into consideration, the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode are set. There is a possibility that the first notification will be notified at a timing that makes the first notification feel uncomfortable, such as the first notification being performed straddling the first notification or the first notification being performed after entering the RUSH mode (with a slight delay). However, according to the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment, the RUSH rush is notified at different timings according to the timing when the selection of the effect type of the RUSH mode is accepted, so that the RUSH rush can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort to the player. Notification can be performed and the interest can be improved.

(2) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH rush at different timings according to the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique. Therefore, the RUSH rush is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after the RUSH mode is entered ( It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (with a slight delay).

(3) The notification control means of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment notifies the RUSH rush depending on whether the length of the remaining time of the ending period of the jackpot technique is shorter than the time required for the RUSH rush notification. At different timings. Therefore, the RUSH rush is notified without considering the length of the remaining time of the ending period, and the first notification is performed across the ending period of the jackpot game and the RUSH mode, or after the RUSH mode is entered ( It is possible to prevent the first notification from being notified at a timing with a sense of incongruity, such as the first notification being performed (with a slight delay).

[Variations of the 8th and 9th embodiments]
Even when the ending period changes depending on the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10 described in the eighth embodiment, the ninth embodiment It is possible to apply a form of selecting the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect during the round game of. In this case, the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, and the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect during this changing ending period. ) Will be selected.

However, during the ending period, the first notification ("RUSH rush") and the second notification ("Please hit right") are performed, or only the first notification is performed during the ending period, and the second notification is performed when the RUSH mode is entered. Whether to perform the first notification or the second notification when the RUSH mode is entered without performing the first and second notifications during the ending period depends on the remaining time TR of the ending period. Therefore, when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10, the round game of the ninth embodiment is performed. Also, when applying the mode of selecting the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode, the flowchart of the transition process described with reference to FIG. 97 can be used.

Specifically, when the ending command is received in step S4101 of FIG. 97 (YES), in step S4102 of FIG. 97, the type and mode (high probability mode) of the symbol of the jackpot game as in step S3402 of FIG. The ending period TE according to the low probability mode) is acquired. Then, when calculating the remaining time TR in step S4106 of FIG. 97, the measurement time is subtracted from the ending period TE according to the type and mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the symbol of the jackpot game, and the ending period. By calculating the remaining time TR of TE, when the ending period changes according to the type (type) of the special symbol of the eighth embodiment and the mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to apply a mode in which the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect is selected during the round game of the ninth embodiment.

<Migration process A>
First, a case where the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately after the start of the ending period TE) will be described with reference to FIG. 98 (a). In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI, the output of the intro ends during the ending period TE. Therefore, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. In this first special effect, for example, a voice such as "Begin!" Is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and a video corresponding to this voice (for example, a video in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. It is controlled so that the player is allowed to move to the RUSH mode, and an effect of giving a feeling of anticipation and an uplifting feeling is executed.

Specifically, from T3 when the effect of the RUSH mode is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the first special effect is executed from the end of the output of the intro to the end of the ending period TE. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the effect for RUSH is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 98 (a), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process B>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (b), a case where the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected after a few seconds have elapsed from the start of the ending period) will be described. .. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is shorter than the intro length TI, the intro is output even after the ending period TE ends. Therefore, the second special effect is executed from the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. In this second special production, the number of prize balls and the logo mark acquired in the big hit game are displayed on the display screen G, and it feels as if the ending period is continuing even though the RUSH mode is entered. The effect given to the player is executed. If the difference between the remaining time TR length and the intro length TI is long (large), the number of prize balls and the logo mark acquired in the jackpot game may be displayed on the display screen G, or any character may be displayed. May be controlled to adjust the time by displaying.

Specifically, from T3 when the effect of the RUSH mode is determined, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the effect of the fourth mode M4 is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, the second special effect is executed from T2 at the end of the ending period TE to the end of the output of the intro. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the intro output, it is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed. Further, in the example of FIG. 98 (b), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Migration process C>
Next, with reference to FIG. 98 (c), a case where the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI (for example, when the effect is selected immediately before the end of the ending period TE) will be described. In the transition process in this case, since the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, the ending period TE ends with almost no output of the intro portion during the ending period TE. Therefore, in the case shown in FIG. 98 (c), the intro output is started after the ending period TE is completed. Further, after the output of the intro is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output.

Specifically, from T2 at the end of the ending period TE, the speaker units 26A to 26C are controlled so that the output of the intro portion of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started. Further, after the output of the intro portion is completed, the verse portion following the intro portion is controlled to be continuously output. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 is controlled so that the right-handed navigation for RUSH for suggesting the right-handed game is started. That is, the right-handed navigation for RUSH is controlled to start at the end of the ending period TE, in other words, at the start of the RUSH mode. Further, at the end of the ending period TE, T2 is controlled so that the video effect of the RUSH mode effect is started.

The volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH is controlled so as to be played back at a lower level than usual. By making the volume of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH lower than usual when entering RUSH, it is possible to prevent the player from hearing the voice of the right-handed navigation system for RUSH "Please hit right" when entering RUSH. It is possible to prevent the player from getting excited. Further, at the end of the ending period, T2 may be controlled so that characters such as "Please hit right" for suggesting a right-handed game are displayed on the display screen G. In this case, in addition to the voice output of "right-handed", characters such as "right-handed" may be controlled to be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in this transition process, the voice of "RUSH rush" is controlled to be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C after the output of the intro portion is completed.

When the remaining time TR is much shorter than the intro length TI, as shown in FIG. 98 (d), the speaker units 26A to 26C are started from T2 at the end of the ending period TE without outputting the intro portion. It may be controlled so that the output of the verse part of the music used in the production of the RUSH mode is started from. Further, in the examples of FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d), the RUSH rush notification is performed after the right-handed navigation, but the RUSH rush notification may be performed before the right-handed navigation.

<Direction transition processing>
Next, the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 98 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 99 to 103. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process to the RUSH mode. Here, the operation of the voice emission control device 400 for the transition process to the RUSH mode described with reference to FIG. 98 will be described.

In step S4201, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending command has been received. In the determination, the MPU 402 confirms whether the ending command is stored in the various flag storage areas. If the MPU 402 determines in step S4201 that the ending command has been received (YES), in step S4202, the MPU 402 acquires the ending period TE based on the ending command. It should be noted that the ending period TE may be acquired by including the information of the length (sec) of the ending period TE in the ending command transmitted from the main control device 300, or the value corresponding to the indicated ending period TE. May be stored in the ROM 412 of the voice emission control device 400, and the jackpot type may be determined from the command type to recognize the ending period TE. Further, in step S4201, if it is not determined that the ending command has been received (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.

In step S4203, the MPU 402 starts a timer to calculate the remaining time TR in step S4205, which will be described later.
Next, in step S4204, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be transferred after the big hit game is determined. In step S4204, if the type (type) of the effect of the RUSH mode to be transferred after the big hit game is not determined (NO), the MPU 402 ends the effect transition process.
Further, in step S4204, when the type (type) of the RUSH mode effect to be shifted after the big hit game is determined (YES), in step S4205, the MPU 402 calculates the remaining time TR. Specifically, the MPU 402 stops the timer started in step S4203, subtracts the time measured by the timer from the ending period TE acquired in step S4202, and calculates the remaining time TR of the ending.

In step S4206, the MPU 402 determines whether the remaining time TR is longer than the length TI of the intro of the selected directed music (BGM). In step S4206, when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 402 executes the transition process D (when the remaining time TR is longer than the intro length TI) in step S4207. The details of the migration process D will be described later.

If the remaining time TR is not longer than the intro length TI in step S4206 (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4208 whether the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI. In step S4208, when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI (YES), the MPU 402 executes the transition process E (when the remaining time TR is the same as the intro length TI) in step S4209. The details of the migration process E will be described later.

In step S4208, if the remaining time TR is not the same as the intro length TI (NO), the MPU 402 determines in step S4210 whether the remaining time TR is longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2). Is determined. In step S4210, if the remaining time TR is longer than half the length TI of the intro (TI / 2) (YES), the MPU 402 performs the migration process F described with reference to FIG. 98 (b) in step S4211. (When the remaining time TR is longer than half of the intro length TI (TI / 2)) is executed. The details of the migration process F will be described later.

In step S4210, if the remaining time TR is not longer than half the intro length TI (TI / 2) (NO), the MPU 402 will refer to FIGS. 98 (c) and 98 (d) in step S4212. The transition process G described above (when the remaining time TR is not longer than half of the intro length TI (TI / 2)) is executed. The details of the migration process G will be described later.

In step S4210, the case is divided by taking the case where the remaining time TR is not longer than half (TI / 2) of the intro length TI as an example, but the length of the remaining time TR to be classified in step S4210. Is arbitrary, and may be classified into cases of 2 sec or less, for example.

<Migration process D>
Next, the transition process D in step S4207 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process D.
In step S4301, the MPU 402 calculates the absolute value | TR-TI | of the value obtained by subtracting the length TI of the intro from the remaining time TR.
In step S4302, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T3 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S4304 and S4306 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the value corresponding to the length TI of the intro in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time, and sets the timer counter T3 to the value corresponding to the absolute value (| TR-TI |) calculated in step S4301. Is set as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and when the absolute value is 2 sec, the MPU 402 is a timer counter. Set "1000" to T3. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T3 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4303, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for directing the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4304, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4302 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4305. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4305.

In step S4305, the MPU 402 starts the first special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets "Begin!". The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of the above is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "Beginning!" Is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 controls so that the image corresponding to this voice (for example, the image in which the character is speaking) is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a first special effect start command to the display control device 500 so that an image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the image corresponding to the sound is displayed on the display screen G based on the first special effect start command transmitted from the MPU 402.

Further, in step S4305, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice of "RUSH rush" for RUSH rush after the voice of "Begin!" From the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and makes a sound. It is set in the register 403b of the output LSI 403, and the sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "RUSH rush" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH rush" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. In addition, "Beginning!" May be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C, or the voice of "Beginning!" May be output from the speaker units 26A to. It may be output from 26C and the character of "RUSH rush" may be displayed on the display screen G.

In step S4306, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T3 set in step S4302 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4307. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processing after step S4307. In step S4307, the MPU 402 controls the sound output LSI 403 so as to end the first special effect. As a result, the output (reproduction) of voice such as "Begin!" Is stopped from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 transmits the first special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the display of the image corresponding to the sound on the display screen G is stopped based on the first special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S4308, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and inputs them to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4309, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S4304 and S4306 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process E>
Next, the transition process E in step S4209 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process E.
In step S4401, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T2 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4403 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the intro length TI in the timer counter T2 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to “5000”. The value set in the timer counter T2 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 99, since the intro length TI and the remaining time TR have the same length, instead of setting the timer counter T2 with the value corresponding to the intro length TI in step S4401 A value corresponding to the remaining time TR may be set in the timer counter T4.

In step S4402, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for directing the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4403, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4402 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process D without executing the processes after step S4405. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4404.

In step S4404, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, and inputs them to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4405, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4403 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process F>
Next, the transition process F in step S4211 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process F.
In step S4501, the MPU 402 sets timer counters T2 and T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time of steps S4503 and S4506 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 with the value corresponding to the length TI of the intro as the measurement time, and sets the timer counter T4 with the value corresponding to the remaining time TR as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the intro length TI is 10 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T2 to "5000", and when the remaining time TR is 7 sec, the MPU 402 is a timer. Set "3500" in the counter T4. The values set in the timer counters T2 and T4 are updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4502, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for directing the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4503, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process F without executing the processes after step S4504. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4504. In step S4504, the MPU 402 executes the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to display a character image (for example, a logo-ized Arabic numeral) corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G. The MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls the VDP505 to display the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls on the display screen G based on the instruction from the MPU 402.

In step S4505, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

In step S4506, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the output of the intro portion of the BGM has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T2 set in step S4501 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the output of the intro portion has not been completed (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process F without executing the processes after step S4507. Further, when it is determined that the output of the intro portion is completed (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processing after step S4507.
In step S4507, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 that the MPU 402 stops the second special effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a second special effect stop command to the display control device 500. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls to stop the display of the character image corresponding to the number of prize balls acquired in the jackpot game on the display screen G based on the second special effect stop command transmitted from the MPU 402. I do.

In step S4508, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the “RUSH rush” voice for RUSH rush from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404, sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and sets the “RUSH rush”. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so that the sound of "" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the speaker units 26A to 26C start the notification of "RUSH rush", in other words, the output (reproduction) of the voice of "RUSH rush". In addition, "RUSH rush" may be displayed in characters on the display screen, and the voice of "RUSH rush" may be output from the speaker units 26A to 26C.

In step S4509, the MPU 402 instructs the display control device 500 to start the video effect for the RUSH effect. Specifically, the MPU 402 instructs the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 to read and reproduce the RUSH effect video data stored in the effect data storage area 1032. Based on the instruction from the MPU 402, the MPU 502 of the display control device 500 controls to read the video data for the RUSH effect from the effect data storage area 1032 and display it on the display screen G on the VDP 505.

The configuration for measuring the time in steps S4503 and S4506 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

<Migration process G>
Next, the transition process G in step S4212 of FIG. 99 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process G.
In step S4601, the MPU 402 sets a timer counter T4 provided in various counter areas of the RAM 413 in order to measure the time in step S4602 described later. Specifically, the MPU 402 sets a value corresponding to the remaining time TR in the timer counter T4 as the measurement time. For example, when the timer interrupt processing cycle is 2 msec and the remaining time TR is 2 sec, the MPU 402 sets the timer counter T4 to “1000”. The value set in the timer counter T4 is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

In step S4602, the MPU 402 determines whether or not the ending period TE has ended based on whether or not the value of the timer counter T4 set in step S4601 is 0. When the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has not ended (NO), the MPU 402 ends the transition process G without executing the processes after step S4603. Further, when the MPU 402 determines that the ending period TE has ended (YES), the MPU 402 executes the processes after step S4603.

In step S4603, the MPU 402 starts outputting music (BGM) for directing the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 reads sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the music data for directing the RUSH mode from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 and sets them in the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403, and the music data is the speaker. The sound output LSI 403 is controlled so as to be output from the units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the intro portion of the music data is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C. Further, the MPU 402 starts displaying the effect video in the RUSH mode. Specifically, the MPU 402 transmits a command to the display control device 500 so that the effect image of the RUSH mode is displayed on the display screen G. In the display control device 500, the MPU 502 controls so that the RUSH mode production image is displayed on the display screen G based on the command transmitted from the MPU 402.

In step S4604, the MPU 402 reads the sequence data, parameter data, and sound data corresponding to the voice data "Please hit right" for right-handed navigation for RUSH from the ROM 412 and the common ROM 404 to the register 403b of the sound output LSI 403. Set and control the sound output LSI 403 so that the voice data "Please hit right" is output from the speaker units 26A to 26C. As a result, the output (reproduction) of the voice data "Please hit right" is started from the speaker units 26A to 26C, and the right-handed navigation for RUSH is started.

The configuration for measuring the time in step S4602 is arbitrary, and may be measured using, for example, a real-time clock (RTC).

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, the features of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be described. Among the features of the present invention group, the configurations corresponding to each of the above-described embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments, and the features of the present invention group are characterized. The combination of each feature, such as deformation and improvement within the range in which the object can be achieved, is included in the features of the present invention group. For example, in each of the above embodiments, the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E, in other words, the amplification factor of the amplifier is changed by the parameters stored in the ROM 412, but the volume of the speaker units 26A to 26E is changed by the volume setting. It may be configured to make it.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature A1 is
A frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame (outer frame 11),
A plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame body, and
Detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and
The detection device includes an abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) that controls the plurality of acoustic devices to notify the abnormality when the opening of the frame is detected.
The abnormality notification means is
When notifying the abnormality, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of audio devices is made lower than the volume of the other audio devices.

According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, since the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when notifying the abnormality, the player playing the game in the adjacent seat may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. It will be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Feature A2.
The gaming machine according to the feature A2 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature A1.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the volume of the acoustic device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side is set to another acoustic device (speaker unit 26B, It is characterized in that the volume is lower than the volume of the 26C or the speaker unit 26A) (including a mode in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero).

According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, the side close to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened is reduced. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature A3.
The gaming machine according to the feature A3 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature A2.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the volume of the acoustic device (speaker units 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) arranged on the support side is not reduced.

According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the support side of the frame body, in other words, the sound device arranged on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

Feature A4.
The gaming machine according to the feature A4 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
A first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame,
A second frame body (front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to the first frame body is provided.
The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) is
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body, and
It is characterized by including a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body.

According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the frame body is composed of a first frame body and a second frame body, and a detection device for detecting that the frame body is opened in each of the first and second frame bodies is provided. Therefore, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening is detected and an abnormality is notified.

Feature A5.
The gaming machine according to the feature A5 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature A4.
A box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) rotatably supported rearward with respect to the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
A detector (back pack unit open detector 289) for detecting the opening of the box-shaped body is provided.
The abnormality notification means is
When the opening of the box-shaped body is detected, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced.

According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, when it is determined that the box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) is open, the warning sound is reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced.

Feature A6.
The gaming machine according to the feature A6 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature A4 or the feature A5.
The first frame body (inner frame 13) is
It is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame with one of the right side or the left side as the support side.
The second frame body (front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the first frame body with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices (second and first monitoring devices 290 and 250). It is characterized in that the volume of the sound device (speaker unit 26A or the speaker unit 26B, 26C) arranged in the above is lower than the volume of another sound device (speaker unit 26B, 26C or the speaker unit 26A).

According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, when one of the first and second frames is opened, that is, the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices, in other words, when one of the first and second frames is opened. Reduce the volume of the sound device located closer to the player sitting next to the player. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature A7.
The gaming machine according to the feature A7 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A6.
A detector is provided for detecting whether the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is opened with either the right side or the left side as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
When notifying the abnormality, which of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) should be made smaller than the volume of the other acoustic devices according to the detection result of the detector. It is characterized by making a judgment.

According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, it is possible to detect whether the frame is open on the right side or the left side. Therefore, even if the frame has a double-open structure, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened. Can be made smaller.

Feature A8.
The gaming machine according to the feature A8 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7.
A sound effect executing means (MPU402) that reproduces sound data for effect and outputs it from the plurality of audio devices is provided.
The voice effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, the reproduction volume of the sound data for effect output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced. do.

According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the reproduction volume is gradually or gradually set to a predetermined value in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM (including music and sound for directing). Perform the process of lowering to. Therefore, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound.

Feature A9.
The gaming machine according to the feature A9 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature A8.
The abnormality notification means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the notification sound output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to zero or substantially zero.
The voice effect executing means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect output from the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually increased or gradually increased. ..

According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, when the notification of an abnormality is stopped, the notification sound is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until it becomes zero or substantially zero, and the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect is gradually reduced. Or increase it step by step. Therefore, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM (including music and voice for directing).

Feature A10.
The gaming machine according to the feature A10 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A9.
A plurality of indicator lamp devices (indicator lamp devices 23A, 23B) arranged in the frame body, respectively.
A light emitting effect executing means (MPU402) for causing the plurality of indicator lamp devices to emit light based on the light emitting data for the effect is provided.
The light emitting effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, at least one of the plurality of indicator lamp devices is not emitted (in other words, turned off).

According to the feature A10 of the present invention group, at least one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is configured not to emit light when notifying that the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) has been opened. .. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to the feature A group of the present invention, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when the abnormality is notified, so that the following problems can be solved.

The door body is usually rotatably supported by a fixed frame to the front side (player side). For example, when the door body is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, the door body is opened. The body will open so that it faces the right or left side of the upper body of the player in the next seat. When the opening of the door is detected, an abnormality notification is emitted from the speaker (sound device), but it is output at a loud volume so that the hall operator and employees can hear it. For this reason, it feels very annoying to the player who plays the game in the next seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the gaming machine may be difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost, and the player Get excited.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature B1 is
The first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable to the fixed frame (outer frame 11),
A second frame body (front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to the first frame body and
The first acoustic device (speaker units 26D, 26E) provided in the first frame body and
One or more second audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the second frame body, and
Detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) for detecting the opening of the first and second frames, and
It is characterized by including an abnormality notification means (MPU 402, sound output LSI 403) that controls the first acoustic device to notify an abnormality when the detection device detects the opening of the first frame body or the second frame body. And.

According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, when the detection device detects the opening of the first frame body or the second frame body, the first acoustic device is controlled to notify the abnormality. Since the first sound device is provided in the first frame body, the abnormality notification sound from the first sound device is not output to the player playing the game in the adjacent seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Feature B2.
The gaming machine according to the feature B2 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature B1.
The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) is
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
It is characterized by including a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body (front door frame 14).

According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, each of the first and second frame bodies is provided with a detection device for detecting that the frame body is opened, so that when any of the first and second frame bodies is opened. However, the opening is detected and an abnormality is notified.

Feature B3.
The gaming machine according to the feature B3 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature B1 or the feature B2.
A box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) rotatably supported rearward with respect to the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
A detector (back pack unit open detector 289) for detecting the opening of the box-shaped body is provided.
The abnormality notification means is
When the opening of the box-shaped body is detected, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, when it is determined that the box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) is open, the warning sound is reduced. As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced.

Feature B4.
The gaming machine according to the feature B4 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B3.
The first frame body (inner frame 13) has a game board (game board 81) through which a game ball flows down.
The first sound device (speaker units 26D, 26E) is
It is characterized in that it is provided on the game board of the first frame body.

According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, since the first sound device is provided on the game board, the degree of freedom of the arrangement position (layout) of the first sound device is improved. Further, since it is attached to the game board, the first acoustic device can be easily attached.

Feature B5.
The gaming machine according to the feature B5 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4.
The second frame body (front door frame 14) has an opening (opening 14c) for transmitting sound output from the first acoustic device (speaker unit 26D).
The opening is characterized in that it is formed at a position facing the first acoustic device when the second frame is closed.

According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, the first sound device can be used not only for the output of the abnormality notification but also for the sound effect during the game and the output of the BGM. Therefore, it is not necessary to newly install an audio device for outputting the abnormality notification sound, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine can be reduced.

Feature B6.
The gaming machine according to the feature B6 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B5.
A sound effect executing means (MPU402) that reproduces sound data for effect and outputs it from the plurality of audio devices is provided.
The voice effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, the reproduction volume of the sound data for effect output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced. do.

According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the reproduction volume is gradually or gradually set to a predetermined value in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM (including music and sound for directing). Perform the process of lowering to. Therefore, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound.

Feature B7.
The gaming machine according to the feature B7 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature B6.
The abnormality notification means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the notification sound output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to zero or substantially zero.
The voice effect executing means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect output from the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually increased or gradually increased. ..

According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, when the notification of an abnormality is stopped, the notification sound is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until it becomes zero or substantially zero, and the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect is gradually reduced. Or increase it step by step. Therefore, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM (including music and voice for directing).

Feature B8.
The gaming machine according to the feature B8 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B7.
A plurality of indicator lamp devices (indicator lamp devices 23A, 23B) arranged in the frame body, respectively.
A light emitting effect executing means (MPU402) for causing the plurality of indicator lamp devices to emit light based on the light emitting data for the effect is provided.
The light emitting effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, at least one of the plurality of indicator lamp devices is not emitted (in other words, turned off).

According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, at least one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is configured not to emit light when notifying that the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) has been opened. .. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to the feature B group of the present invention, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when the abnormality is notified, so that the following problems can be solved.

The door body is usually rotatably supported by a fixed frame to the front side (player side). For example, when the door body is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, the door body is opened. The body will open so that it faces the right or left side of the upper body of the player in the next seat. When the opening of the door is detected, an abnormality notification is emitted from the speaker (sound device), but it is output at a loud volume so that the hall operator and employees can hear it. For this reason, it feels very annoying to the player who plays the game in the next seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the gaming machine may be difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost, and the player Get excited.

<Characteristic C group>
Features C1.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature C1 is
A frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame (outer frame 11),
A plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame body, and
Detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and
When the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) for notifying the abnormality from the plurality of acoustic devices, and
A cover member (cover member 27) provided in one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices or in the vicinity thereof and having a first state that does not cover the audio device and a second state that covers the audio device.
When the detection device detects the opening of the frame body, the cover member is provided with a driving means (cover member driving unit 30) that changes the cover member from the first state to the second state.

According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body, the cover member provided at or near any one of the plurality of acoustic devices is changed from the first state to the second state. Since the state changes, the abnormality notification sound output forward from the audio device is attenuated by the cover member and becomes smaller. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Feature C2.
The gaming machine according to the feature C2 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C1.
The gaming machine is
When in the second state of covering the sound device (speaker unit 26A), the abnormal notification sound output from the sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) is emitted from the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14). It is characterized by having a taxiway (14e) that guides the speaker in a direction other than the front of the door.

According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, when the taxiway is provided and the cover member is in the second state of covering the acoustic device, the abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device is other than the front of the frame by the taxiway. For example, it is guided to the side (side surface side), the upper side (upper surface side), and the lower side (bottom side) of the game machine. Therefore, when the frame of the gaming machine is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

Feature C3.
The gaming machine according to the feature C3 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C1 or the feature C2.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The cover member (cover member 27) is
Among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the acoustic device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side is provided or in the vicinity thereof. do.

According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, the side close to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is determined by the cover member. It gets smaller. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature C4.
The gaming machine according to the feature C4 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C3.
The cover member (cover member 27) is
Among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the acoustic device (speaker unit 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) arranged on the support side or its vicinity is not provided.

According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the support side of the frame body, in other words, the sound device arranged on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

Feature C5.
The gaming machine according to the feature C5 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C4.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
A first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame,
A second frame body (front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to the first frame body is provided.
The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) is
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body, and
It is characterized by including a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body.

According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, the frame body is composed of the first frame body (inner frame 13) and the second frame body (front door frame), and each of the first and second frame bodies has a frame body. Since the detection device for detecting the opening is provided, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening is detected and the abnormality is notified.

Feature C6.
The gaming machine according to the feature C6 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C5.
A box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) rotatably supported rearward with respect to the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
A detector (back pack unit open detector 289) for detecting the opening of the box-shaped body is provided.
The abnormality notification means is
When the opening of the box-shaped body is detected, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced.

According to the feature C6 of the present invention group, when it is determined that the box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) is open, the warning sound is reduced. As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced.

Feature C7.
The gaming machine according to the feature C7 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C5 or the feature C6.
The first frame body (inner frame 13) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The second frame body (front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the first frame body (inner frame 13) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The drive means (cover member drive unit 30) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices (second and first monitoring devices 290 and 250). It is characterized in that the cover member provided in or near the acoustic device arranged in the first state is changed from the first state to the second state.

According to the feature C7 of the present invention group, when one of the first and second frames is opened, that is, the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices, in other words, when one of the first and second frames is opened. The volume of the sound device placed on the side closer to the player sitting next to the seat is reduced. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature C8.
The gaming machine according to the feature C8 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7.
A detector is provided for detecting whether the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is opened with either the right side or the left side as the support side.
The drive means (cover member drive unit 30) is
Depending on the detection result of the detector, the cover provided on or near any of the acoustic devices (speaker section 26A or speaker sections 26B, 26C) of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C). It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the member (cover member 27) is changed from the first state to the second state.

According to the feature C8 of the present invention group, it is possible to detect whether the frame is open on the right side or the left side. Therefore, even if the frame has a double-open structure, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened. Can be made smaller.

Feature C9.
The gaming machine according to the feature C9 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C8.
A sound effect executing means (MPU402) that reproduces sound data for effect and outputs it from the plurality of audio devices is provided.
The voice effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, the reproduction volume of the sound data for effect output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced. do.

According to the feature C9 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the reproduction volume is gradually or gradually set to a predetermined value in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM (including music and sound for directing). Perform the process of lowering to. Therefore, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound.

Feature C10.
The gaming machine according to the feature C10 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature C9.
The abnormality notification means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the notification sound output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to zero or substantially zero.
The voice effect executing means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect output from the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually increased or gradually increased. ..

According to the feature C10 of the present invention group, when the notification of an abnormality is stopped, the notification sound is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until it becomes zero or substantially zero, and the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect is gradually reduced. Or increase it step by step. Therefore, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM (including music and voice for directing).

Feature C11.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature C11 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10.
A plurality of indicator lamp devices (indicator lamp devices 23A, 23B) arranged in the frame body, respectively.
A light emitting effect executing means (MPU402) for causing the plurality of indicator lamp devices to emit light based on the light emitting data for the effect is provided.
The light emitting effect executing means is
When the abnormality notifying means notifies an abnormality, at least one of the plurality of indicator lamp devices is not emitted (in other words, turned off).

According to the feature C11 of the present invention group, at least one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is configured not to emit light when notifying that the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) has been opened. .. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to the feature C group of the present invention, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when the abnormality is notified, so that the following problems can be solved.

The door body is usually rotatably supported by a fixed frame to the front side (player side). For example, when the door body is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, the door body is opened. The body will open so that it faces the right or left side of the upper body of the player in the next seat. When the opening of the door is detected, an abnormality notification is emitted from the speaker (sound device), but it is output at a loud volume so that the hall operator and employees can hear it. For this reason, it feels very annoying to the player who plays the game in the next seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the gaming machine may be difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost, and the player Get excited.

<Characteristic D group>
Feature D1.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature D1 is
A frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame (outer frame 11),
A plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame body, and
Detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and
When the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) for notifying the abnormality from the plurality of acoustic devices, and
When the detection device detects the opening of the frame body, the direction of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is from the first state in which the frame body faces the front side to the direction other than the front side of the frame body. It is characterized by including a driving means (speaker unit driving unit 26d) for changing to the second state.

According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body, the direction of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices changes from the first state to the second state, and the frame. The abnormality notification sound is not output to the player located in front of the body, in other words, the player playing the game in the next seat. Therefore, the possibility that the player is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is reduced. In addition, since it is possible to prevent the music and voice output from the gaming machine from becoming difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost and the game is played. The risk of people getting excited is reduced.

Feature D2.
The gaming machine according to the feature D2 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D1.
The gaming machine is
When the audio device (speaker units 26A to 26C) is in the second state, it is characterized by including a taxiway that guides the abnormal notification sound output from the audio device in a direction other than the front of the frame.

According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, when the taxiway is provided and the acoustic device is in the second state, the abnormal notification sound output from the acoustic device is emitted from the taxiway in a direction other than the front of the frame, for example. , It is guided to the side (side surface side), the upper side (upper surface side), and the lower side (bottom side) of the game machine. Therefore, when the frame of the gaming machine is opened, the risk of annoying the abnormality notification sound to the player located in front is reduced. Further, since the induced abnormality notification sound is output from a direction other than the front of the frame, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

Feature D3.
The gaming machine according to the feature D3 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D1 or the feature D2.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The drive means (speaker unit drive unit 26d) is
It is characterized in that the direction of the acoustic device (speaker section 26A or the speaker sections 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C) is changed.

According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the second state is a sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, a side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened. .. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature D4.
The gaming machine according to the feature D4 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D3.
The drive means (speaker unit drive unit 26d) is
Among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker sections 26A to 26C), the acoustic devices (speaker sections 26B, 26C or speaker sections 26A) arranged on the support side are kept in the first state.

According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the support side of the frame body, in other words, the sound device arranged on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened is kept in the first state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

Feature D5.
The gaming machine according to the feature D5 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D4.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
A first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable to the fixed frame (outer frame 11) and
A second frame body (front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to the first frame body is provided.
The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) is
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body, and
It is characterized by including a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body.

According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the frame body is composed of the first frame body (inner frame 13) and the second frame body (front door frame), and each of the first and second frame bodies has a frame body. Since the detection device for detecting the opening is provided, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening is detected and the abnormality is notified.

Feature D6.
The gaming machine according to the feature D6 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D5.
A box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) rotatably supported rearward with respect to the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
A detector (back pack unit open detector 289) for detecting the opening of the box-shaped body is provided.
The abnormality notification means is
When the opening of the box-shaped body is detected, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced.

According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, when it is determined that the box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) is open, the warning sound is reduced. As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced.

Feature D7.
The gaming machine according to the feature D7 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D5 or the feature D6.
The first frame body (inner frame 13) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The second frame body (front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the first frame body (inner frame 13) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The drive means (speaker unit drive unit 26d) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the frame body (inner frame 13, front door) whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices (second and first monitoring devices 290 and 250). It is characterized in that an audio device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame 14) is changed from the first state to the second state.

According to the feature D7 of the present invention group, when one of the first and second frames is opened, that is, the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices, in other words, when one of the first and second frames is opened. The volume from the sound device located closer to the player sitting next to the frame to the front of the frame is reduced. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature D8.
The gaming machine according to the feature D8 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D7.
A detector is provided for detecting whether the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is opened with either the right side or the left side as the support side.
The drive means (speaker unit drive unit 26d) is
It is determined which of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) to change from the first state to the second state according to the detection result by the detector. It is a feature.

According to the feature D8 of the present invention group, it is possible to detect whether the frame is open on the right side or the left side. Therefore, even if the frame has a double-open structure, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened. Can be made smaller.

Feature D9.
The gaming machine according to the feature D9 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D8.
A sound effect executing means (MPU402) that reproduces sound data for effect and outputs it from the plurality of audio devices is provided.
The voice effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, the reproduction volume of the sound data for effect output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced. do.

According to the feature D9 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the reproduction volume is gradually or gradually set to a predetermined value in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM (including music and sound for directing). Perform the process of lowering to. Therefore, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound.

Feature D10.
The gaming machine according to the feature D10 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature D9.
The abnormality notification means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the notification sound output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to zero or substantially zero.
The voice effect executing means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect output from the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually increased or gradually increased. ..

According to the feature D10 of the present invention group, when the notification of an abnormality is stopped, the notification sound is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until it becomes zero or substantially zero, and the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect is gradually reduced. Or increase it step by step. Therefore, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM (including music and voice for directing).

Feature D11.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature D11 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features D1 to D10.
A plurality of indicator lamp devices (indicator lamp devices 23A, 23B) arranged in the frame body, respectively.
A light emitting effect executing means (MPU402) for causing the plurality of indicator lamp devices to emit light based on the light emitting data for the effect is provided.
The light emitting effect executing means is
When the abnormality notifying means notifies an abnormality, at least one of the plurality of indicator lamp devices is not emitted (in other words, turned off).

According to the feature D11 of the present invention group, at least one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is configured not to emit light when notifying that the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) has been opened. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to the feature D group of the present invention, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when the abnormality is notified, so that the following problems can be solved.

The door body is usually rotatably supported by a fixed frame to the front side (player side). For example, when the door body is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, the door body is opened. The body will open so that it faces the right or left side of the upper body of the player in the next seat. When the opening of the door is detected, an abnormality notification is emitted from the speaker (sound device), but it is output at a loud volume so that the hall operator and employees can hear it. For this reason, it feels very annoying to the player who plays the game in the next seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the gaming machine may be difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost, and the player Get excited.

<Feature E>
Features E1.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature E1 is
A frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame (outer frame 11),
A plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) provided in the frame body, and
Detection devices (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) that detect the opening of the frame, and
The detection device includes an abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) that controls the plurality of acoustic devices to notify the abnormality when the opening of the frame is detected.
The abnormality notification means is
It is characterized in that the volume of the plurality of acoustic devices is gradually or gradually reduced when the abnormality is notified.

According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the notification is performed at a loud volume at first, but the volume is gradually or gradually reduced, so that the player who effectively sits next to the seat may be annoyed by the abnormal notification sound. While reducing the number, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification.

Feature E2.
The gaming machine according to the feature E2 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E1.
The abnormality notification means is
It is characterized in that the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is gradually or gradually reduced from the volume of the other acoustic devices.

According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced, so that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat may be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. It will be reduced. In addition, since the volume output from other audio devices is not reduced, the risk of the player losing the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine is reduced and the player is more effective. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee misses the abnormality notification.

Feature E3.
The gaming machine according to the feature E3 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E1 or the feature E2.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the fixed frame (outer frame 11) with one of the right side portion and the left side portion as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the volume of the acoustic device (speaker unit 26A or speaker units 26B, 26C) arranged on a side different from the support side is set to another acoustic device (speaker unit 26B, It is characterized in that the volume is gradually or gradually smaller than the volume of the 26C or the speaker unit 26A) (including an embodiment in which the reproduction volume is zero or substantially zero).

According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the side different from the support side of the frame body, in other words, the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened is stepwise or Make it smaller gradually. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature E4.
The gaming machine according to the feature E4 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E3.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Among the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the volume of the acoustic device (speaker units 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A) arranged on the support side is not reduced.

According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the volume of the sound device arranged on the support side of the frame body, in other words, the sound device arranged on the far side for the player sitting next to the frame body when the frame body is opened, is not reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player sitting next to the seat will be annoyed by the abnormality notification sound, and at the same time, reduce the risk that the hall operator or employee will miss the abnormality notification sound.

Feature E5.
The gaming machine according to the feature E5 (gaming machine 10) is a gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E4.
The frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is
A first frame body (inner frame 13) that is openable and closable with respect to the fixed frame,
A second frame body (front door frame 14) that is openable and closable to the first frame body is provided.
The detection device (first and second monitoring devices 250, 290) is
A first detection device (second monitoring device 290) that detects the opening of the first frame body, and
It is characterized by including a second detection device (first monitoring device 250) for detecting the opening of the second frame body.

According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the frame body is composed of a first frame body and a second frame body, and a detection device for detecting that the frame body is opened in each of the first and second frame bodies is provided. Therefore, even if any of the first and second frames is opened, the opening is detected and an abnormality is notified.

Feature E6.
The gaming machine according to the feature E6 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E5.
A box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) rotatably supported rearward with respect to the first frame body (inner frame 13), and
A detector (back pack unit open detector 289) for detecting the opening of the box-shaped body is provided.
The abnormality notification means is
When the opening of the box-shaped body is detected, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced.

According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, when it is determined that the box-shaped body (back pack unit 15) is open, the warning sound is reduced (two-step control). As a result, it is not necessary to listen to a loud warning sound forever during maintenance that requires time, and the possibility that the player playing the game in the next seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound is further reduced.

Feature E7.
The gaming machine according to the feature E7 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E5 or the feature E6.
The first frame body (inner frame 13) is
It is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame with one of the right side or the left side as the support side.
The second frame body (front door frame 14) is
It is supported by one of the right side portion and the left side portion of the first frame body with one of the right side portion or the left side portion as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
Of the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C), the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices (second and first monitoring devices 290 and 250). The feature is that the volume of the sound device (speaker unit 26A or speaker unit 26B, 26C) arranged in the above is gradually or gradually reduced from the volume of another sound device (speaker unit 26B, 26C or speaker unit 26A). And.

According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, when one of the first and second frames is opened, that is, the side different from the support side of the frame whose opening is detected by the first and second detection devices, in other words, when one of the first and second frames is opened. Reduce the volume of the sound device located closer to the player sitting next to the player. Therefore, it is more effectively reduced that the player sitting next to the seat is annoyed by the abnormality notification sound. In addition, it is possible to more effectively suppress that the music and voice output from the gaming machine being played are difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated from the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost. The risk of the player getting excited is further reduced.

Feature E8.
The gaming machine according to the feature E8 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E7.
A detector is provided for detecting whether the frame body (inner frame 13, front door frame 14) is opened with either the right side or the left side as the support side.
The abnormality notification means (MPU402, sound output LSI403) is
When notifying the abnormality, the volume of any of the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually or gradually reduced from the volume of the other audio devices according to the detection result of the detector. It is characterized in that it is determined whether to make it smaller.

According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, it is possible to detect whether the frame is open on the right side or the left side. Therefore, even if the frame has a double-open structure, the volume of the sound device arranged on a side different from the support side of the frame, in other words, on the side closer to the player sitting next to the frame when the frame is opened. Can be made smaller.

Feature E9.
The gaming machine according to the feature E9 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E8.
A sound effect executing means (MPU402) that reproduces sound data for effect and outputs it from the plurality of audio devices is provided.
The voice effect executing means is
When the abnormality notification means notifies an abnormality, the reproduction volume of the sound data for effect output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced. do.

According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, when an abnormality is notified, the reproduction volume is gradually or gradually set to a predetermined value in a state where the reproduction is continued without stopping the BGM (including music and sound for directing). Perform the process of lowering to. Therefore, the BGM is suddenly stopped, and the notification can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with the warning sound.

Feature E10.
The gaming machine according to the feature E10 (gaming machine 10) is the gaming machine according to the feature E9.
The abnormality notification means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the notification sound output from the plurality of acoustic devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually reduced or gradually reduced to zero or substantially zero.
The voice effect executing means is
When the notification of the abnormality is stopped, the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect output from the plurality of audio devices (speaker units 26A to 26C) is gradually increased or gradually increased. ..

According to the feature E10 of the present invention group, when the notification of an abnormality is stopped, the notification sound is gradually reduced or gradually reduced until it becomes zero or substantially zero, and the reproduction volume of the sound data for the effect is gradually reduced. Or increase it step by step. Therefore, the warning sound is suddenly stopped, and the return can be performed without causing a sense of discomfort due to the replacement with BGM (including music and voice for directing).

Feature E11.
The gaming machine (gaming machine 10) according to the feature E11 is a gaming machine according to any one of the features E1 to E10.
A plurality of indicator lamp devices (indicator lamp devices 23A, 23B) arranged in the frame body, respectively.
A light emitting effect executing means (MPU402) for causing the plurality of indicator lamp devices to emit light based on the light emitting data for the effect is provided.
The light emitting effect executing means is
When the abnormality notifying means notifies an abnormality, at least one of the plurality of indicator lamp devices is not emitted (in other words, turned off).

According to the feature E11 of the present invention group, at least one of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is configured not to emit light when notifying that the frame body (inner frame 13 or front door frame 14) has been opened. Therefore, the possibility that the player playing the game in the adjacent seat is annoyed by the light emission of the indicator lamp devices 23A and 23B is reduced. As a result, the player who plays the game in the next seat loses the feeling of exhilaration and immersiveness, and the risk of getting excited is reduced.

According to the feature E group of the present invention, the volume of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is reduced when the abnormality is notified, so that the following problems can be solved.

The door body is usually rotatably supported by a fixed frame to the front side (player side). For example, when the door body is opened during maintenance (maintenance / maintenance / maintenance / inspection / maintenance) or repair, the door body is opened. The body will open so that it faces the right or left side of the upper body of the player in the next seat. When the opening of the door is detected, an abnormality notification is emitted from the speaker (sound device), but it is output at a loud volume so that the hall operator and employees can hear it. For this reason, it feels very annoying to the player who plays the game in the next seat. In addition, the music and voice output from the gaming machine may be difficult to hear due to the abnormality notification, and the exhilaration and immersive feeling generated by the music and voice output from the gaming machine are lost, and the player Get excited.

As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines.

10 ... Pachinko machine (game machine), 11 ... Outer frame, 12 ... Game machine body, 13 ... Inner frame, 14 ... Front door frame, 21 ... Window part, 22 ... Window panel, 23 ... Display lamp device, 24 ... Error Indicator lamp unit, 26A to 26E ... Speaker unit, 30 ... Cover member drive unit, 31 ... Upper bulging part, 32 ... Lower bulging part, 33 ... Upper plate, 34 ... Lower plate, 35 ... Operation button, 41 ... Launch handle, 81 ... game board, 82 ... general winning opening (10 prize balls), 83 ... variable winning device, 85 ... through gate, 86 ... variable display unit, 87 ... out opening, 88 ... rotation guide member, 89 ... Game nails, 91 ... symbol display device, 250 ... first monitoring device, 290 ... second monitoring device, 300 ... main control device, 400 ... voice emission control device, 500 ... display control device

Claims (3)

A frame body that can be opened and closed with respect to the fixed frame,
A plurality of audio devices provided in the frame and
A detection device that detects the opening of the frame, and
An abnormality notification means for notifying an abnormality from the plurality of acoustic devices when the detection device detects the opening of the frame body.
When the detection device detects the opening of the frame, the direction of any one or more of the plurality of acoustic devices is from the first state in which the frame faces the front to a direction other than the front of the frame. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a driving means for changing to the second state. The gaming machine is
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a taxiway that guides an abnormality notification sound output from the audio device in a direction other than the front of the frame when the audio device is in the second state. The frame is
It is supported by one of the right side or the left side of the fixed frame with one of the right side or the left side as the support side.
The driving means is
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the direction of the acoustic device arranged on a side different from the support side among the plurality of acoustic devices is changed.

Images